Professional Documents
Culture Documents
CH1 TeSys Motor Starters - Open Version
CH1 TeSys Motor Starters - Open Version
b 7.5 to 132 kW, without mechanical interlock,for customer assembly . . . page 1/41
1
TeSys U starter-controllers
b 3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/80
10
1/0
0
7H6\V4XLFNWLQVWDOODWLRQV\VWHPIRUPRWRUVWDUWHU
components
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/190
b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/192
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/197
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/200
10
1/1
1
General
Type 1 coordination
Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to
resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts.
Type 2 coordination
Type 2 coordination requires that In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must subsequently
EHDEOHWRUHVXPHRSHUDWLRQ7KHULVNRIFRQWDFWZHOGLQJLVSHUPLVVLEOHLQWKLVFDVH
the manufacturer must indicate measures to be taken regarding maintenance of the
equipment.
Current values
Overload zone
Low-level
short-circuit zone
Short-circuit zone
5
1
6WDQGDUG,(&VSHFLHVWKHFXUUHQWYDOXHVWREHXVHGIRUFKHFNLQJ
coordination between the thermal overload relay and the short-circuit protection
device:
b at 0.75 Ico only the thermal overload relay must trip,
b at 1.25 Ico the short-circuit protection device must operate.
2
4
5
3
1
In
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
6
10
Ir
50
Iq
Current r (kA)
1
3
5
10
18
30
10
1/2
General (continued)
Selection
No coordination
Type 1 coordination
Consequences:
v VLJQLFDQWDPRXQWRIPDFKLQHGRZQWLPH
v skilled maintenance personnel required to repair,
check, obtain supplies.
Example: air conditioning in commercial premises.
Type 2 coordination
Example: escalators.
Total coordination
Consequences:
v immediate return to service,
v no special precautions required.
([DPSOHVVPRNHH[WUDFWLRQUHJKWLQJSXPSV
10
1/3
Selection guide
Applications
Pre-assembled starters
Starter type
Level of service
Type 1 coordination
Power at 400 V
Up to 5.5 kW
Type of components
Pages
Machines starting
under no-load:
star-delta starters
Up to 37 kW
Up to 132 kW
Fuse carrier
+ plate-mounted
contactor
3 contactors
(line, star and delta,
mounted on plate,
rail or chassis)
1/34
1/37
10
1/4
Type 2 coordination
Up to 37 kW
Total coordination
Up to 15 kW
Up to 110 kW
Up to 315 kW
Starter-controller
Thermal magnetic
circuit-breaker
+ contactor(s)
Magnetic circuit-breaker
+ contactor(s)
+ thermal overload relay
Fuse carrier
+ contactor(s)
+ thermal overload relay
Switch-disconnector-fuse
+ contactor(s)
+ thermal overload relay
1/22
1/31
1/23, 1/31
1/32 and 1/33
Up to 355 kW
10
1/5
References
Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
GV2
400/415 V
kA
ME06K1
50
ME07K1
50
ME08K1
50
ME10K1
50
ME14K1
50
ME16K1
15
440 V
kA
50
50
50
50
15
500 V
kA
50
50
50
50
10 (4 kW)
6 (5.5 kW)
References
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing
Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415 V
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
GV2 ME10K1pp
Pre-assembled
Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)
Weight
kW
0.37
0.55
kW
0.37
0.55
kW
0.37
0.55
0.75
A
11.6
A
22.5
GV2 ME06
LC1 K06
GV2 ME06K1pp
kg
0.460
0.75
0.75
1.1
1.1
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 ME07
LC1 K06
GV2 ME07K1pp
0.460
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.54
51
GV2 ME08
LC1 K06
GV2 ME08K1pp
0.460
2.2
2.2
3
46.3
78
GV2 ME10
LC1 K06
GV2 ME10K1pp
0.460
3
4
4
5.5
610
138
GV2 ME14
LC1 K09
GV2 ME14K1pp
0.460
5.5
5.5
7.5
914
170
GV2 ME16
LC1 K12
GV2 ME16K1pp
0.460
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
10
GV2 AF01
Add-on blocks
Description
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor
Weight
kg
0.020
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11
3OHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
6WDQGDUGFRQWUROFLUFXLWYROWDJHVIRURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
Volts
24
110
220/230
230
230/240
a 50/60 Hz
B7
F7
M7
P7
U7
c (4)
BW3
(4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
10
Dimensions :
page 1/12
1/6
Schemes :
page 1/14
380/400
Q7
References
Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
GV2
400/415 V
kA
ME06K2
50
ME07K2
50
ME08K2
50
ME10K2
50
ME14K2
50
ME16K2
15
440 V
kA
50
50
50
50
15
500 V
kA
50
50
50
50
10/4 kW
6/5.5 kW
References
GV2 ME10K2pp
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
Pre-assembled
Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Weight
kW
0.37
0.55
kW
0.37
0.55
kW
0.37
0.55
0.75
A
11.6
A
22.5
GV2 ME06
LC2 K06
GV2 ME06K2pp
kg
0.460
0.75
0.75
1.1
1.1
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 ME07
LC2 K06
GV2 ME07K2pp
0.460
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.54
51
GV2 ME08
LC2 K06
GV2 ME08K2pp
0.460
2.2
2.2
3
46.3
78
GV2 ME10
LC2 K06
GV2 ME10K2pp
0.460
3
4
4
5.5
610
138
GV2 ME14
LC2 K09
GV2 ME14K2pp
0.460
5.5
5.5
7.5
914
170
GV2 ME16
LC2 K12
GV2 ME16K2pp
0.460
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
10
GV2 AF01
Add-on blocks
Description
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor
Weight
kg
0.020
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
3OHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
6WDQGDUGFRQWUROFLUFXLWYROWDJHVIRURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
Volts
24
110
220/230
230
230/240
a 50/60 Hz
B7
F7
M7
P7
U7
c (4)
BW3
(4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
380/400
Q7
10
Dimensions :
page 1/12
Schemes :
page 1/14
1/7
References
Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
GV2
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
400/415 V
440 V
500 V
kA
kA
kA
DM 102 to
DM 110
DM 114
DM 116
DM 120
DM 121
DM 122
DM 132
50
50
50
50
15
6
15
8
6
15
8
6
15
6
4
15
6
4
10
6
4
References
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing
Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415 V
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
kW
A
0.160.25
0.250.40
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
11
15
18.5
Pre-assembled
Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(2)
A
2.4
5
GV2 ME02
GV2 ME03
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
kg
0.596
0.596
0.400.63
GV2 ME04
LC1 D09pp
0.596
0.631
13
GV2 ME05
LC1 D09pp
0.596
11.6
22.5
GV2 ME06
LC1 D09pp
0.596
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 ME07
LC1 D09pp
0.596
2.54
51
GV2 ME08
LC1 D09pp
0.596
46.3
78
GV2 ME10
LC1 D09pp
0.596
610
138
GV2 ME14
LC1 D09pp
0.596
914
1318
170
223
GV2 ME16
GV2 ME20
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D18pp
GV2 DM116pp
GV2 DM120pp
0.601
0.606
1723
2025
2432
327
327
416
GV2 ME21
GV2 ME22
GV2 ME32
LC1 D25pp
LC1 D25pp
LC1 D32pp
GV2 DM121pp
GV2 DM122pp
GV2 DM132pp
0.646
0.646
0.651
GV2 DM102pp
kW
0.06
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
11
15
kW
0.06
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
11
15
Weight
Add-on blocks
Description
Mounting of
Sold in
Unit
Weight
GV2
lots of
reference
kg
10
GV2-AF3
0.016
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5 rail
GV2-AF4
0.016
Mounting plate 10
LAD 311
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
6WDQGDUGFRQWUROFLUFXLWYROWDJHVIRURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
Volts
24
220
230
a 50/60 Hz
B7
M7
P7
c (4)
BD
10
Dimensions :
page 1/12
1/8
Schemes :
page 1/14
References
Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
GV2
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
400/415 V
kA
DM202 to
DM210
50
DM214
DM216
DM220
DM221
DM222
DM232
50
15
15
15
15
10
440 V
kA
50
15
500 V
kA
50
10
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing (2)
Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415 V
GV2 DM202pp
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
Pre-assembled
Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed (3)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (4)
Weight
kW
0.06
kW
0.06
kW
A
0.160.25
A
2.4
GV2 ME02
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM202pp
kg
0.963
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
0.250.40
GV2 ME03
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM203pp
0.963
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
0.400.63
GV2 ME04
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM204pp
0.963
0.631
13
GV2 ME05
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM205pp
0.963
11.6
22.5
GV2 ME06
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM206pp
0.963
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 ME07
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM207pp
0.963
2.54
51
GV2 ME08
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM208pp
0.963
46.3
78
GV2 ME10
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM210pp
0.963
610
138
GV2 ME14
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM214pp
0.963
914
170
GV2 ME16
LC2 D12pp
GV2 DM216pp
0.973
7.5
7.5
9
11
9
11
1318
223
GV2 ME20
LC2 D18pp
GV2 DM220pp
0.983
1723
327
GV2 ME21
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DM221pp
1.063
11
15
2025
327
GV2 ME22
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DM222pp
1.063
15
15
18.5
2432
416
GV2 ME32
LC2 D32pp
GV2 DM232pp
1.073
Add-on blocks
Description
Mounting of
Sold in
Unit
Weight
GV2
lots of
reference
kg
10
GV2-AF3
0.016
Combination block between
5 rail
circuit-breaker and contactor
GV2-AF4
0.016
Mounting plate 10
LAD 311
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
(2) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/20.
(3) See page 5/62.
6WDQGDUGFRQWUROFLUFXLWYROWDJHVIRURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
Volts
24
220
230
a 50/60 Hz
B7
M7
P7
c (5)
BD
10
Dimensions :
page 1/12
Schemes :
page 1/14
1/9
References
Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
GV2
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
400/415 V
kA
DP102 to
DP110
130
DP114
DP116
DP120
DP121
DP122
DP132
130
130
50
50
50
50
440 V
kA
130
130
50
20
20
20
20
500 V
kA
130
50
42
10
10
10
10
References
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing
GV2 DP102pp
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
Pre-assembled
Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)
Weight
kW
0.06
kW
0.06
kW
A
0.160.25
A
2.4
GV2 P02
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP102pp
kg
0.686
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
0.250.40
GV2 P03
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP103pp
0.686
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
0.400.63
GV2 P04
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP104pp
0.686
0.631
13
GV2 P05
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP105pp
0.686
11.6
22.5
GV2 P06
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP106pp
0.686
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 P07
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP107pp
0.686
2.54
51
GV2 P08
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP108pp
0.696
46.3
78
GV2 P10
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP110pp
0.736
610
138
GV2 P14
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP114pp
0.736
914
170
GV2 P16
LC1 D25pp
GV2 DP116pp
0.741
1318
223
GV2 P20
LC1 D25pp
GV2 DP120pp
0.736
11
11
1723
327
GV2 P21
LC1 D25pp
GV2 DP121pp
0.741
11
15
2025
327
GV2 P22
LC1 D25pp
GV2 DP122pp
0.741
15
15
18.5
2432
416
GV2 P32
LC1 D32pp
GV2 DP132pp
0.741
18.5
3040
560
LC1 D50App
1.725
18.5
22
3040
560
LC1 D65App
1.730
22
3750
700
LC1 D50App
1.725
22
30
3750
700
LC1 D65App
1.730
30
37
4865
910
LC1 D65App
1.730
Add-on blocks
Description
GV3 P651
+
LC1 D65App
10
Dimensions :
page 1/12
1/10
Mounting of
Sold in
Unit
Weight
GV2
lots of
reference
kg
10
GV2-AF3
0.016
Combination block between
5 rail
circuit-breaker and contactor
GV2-AF4
0.016
Mounting plate 10
LAD 311
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
(2) See page 5/62.
6WDQGDUGFRQWUROFLUFXLWYROWDJHVIRURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
Volts
24
220
230
a 50/60 Hz
B7
M7
P7
c (5)
BD
(4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting.
For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see
page 5/85).
(5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
Schemes :
page 1/14
References
Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
GV2
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
400/415 V
kA
DP202 to
DP210
130
DP214
DP216
DP220
DP221
DP222
DP232
130
130
50
50
50
50
440 V
kA
130
130
50
20
20
20
20
500 V
kA
130
50
42
10
10
10
10
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing
Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415 V
GV2 DP202pp
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
Pre-assembled
Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)
Weight
kW
0.06
kW
0.06
kW
A
0.160.25
A
2.4
GV2 P02
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP202pp
kg
1.053
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
0.250.40
GV2 P03
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP203pp
1.053
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
0.400.63
GV2 P04
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP204pp
1.053
0.631
13
GV2 P05
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP205pp
1.053
11.6
22.5
GV2 P06
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP206pp
1.053
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 P07
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP207pp
1.053
2.54
51
GV2 P08
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP208pp
1.073
46.3
78
GV2 P10
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP210pp
1.153
610
138
GV2 P14
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP214pp
1.153
914
170
GV2 P16
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DP216pp
1.163
1318
223
GV2 P20
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DP220pp
1.153
11
11
1723
327
GV2 P21
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DP221pp
1.163
11
15
2025
327
GV2 P22
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DP222pp
1.163
15
15
18.5
2432
416
GV2 P32
LC2 D32pp
GV2 DP232pp
1.163
18.5
3040
560
LC2 D50App
2.750
18.5
22
3040
560
LC2 D65App
2.760
22
3750
700
LC2 D50App
2.750
22
30
3750
700
LC2 D65App
2.760
30
37
4865
910
LC2 D65App
2.760
Add-on blocks
Description
GV3 P651
+
LC2 D65App
Dimensions :
page 1/12
Mounting of
Sold in
Unit
Weight
GV2
lots of
reference
kg
10
GV2-AF3
0.016
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5 rail
GV2-AF4
0.016
Mounting plate 10
LAD 311
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
(2) See page 5/62.
6WDQGDUGFRQWUROFLUFXLWYROWDJHVIRURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
Volts
24
220
230
a 50/60 Hz
B7
M7
P7
c (5)
BD
(4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting.
For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see
page 5/85).
(5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
Schemes :
page 1/14
1/11
10
Dimensions,
mounting
GV2 MEppKppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200
GV2 MEppK1pp
GV2 MEppK2pp
2
11
66
87
152
152
45
90
4
GV2 DMppppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200
GV2 DM1pppp
GV2 DM2pppp
6
c1
45
c1
c
d1
d
GV2
b
c
c1
DMp02pp to
DMp20pp
176.4
99.6
94.1
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/12
DMp21pp to
DMp32pp
186.8
105.9
100.4
GV2
c
c1
d
d1
DMp02pp to
DMp20pp
135.6
130.1
112.5
107
234
125 3
DMp21pp to
DMp32pp
141.9
136.4
112.5
107
90
Dimensions,
mounting (continued)
GV2 DPppppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200
GV2 DP1pppp
GV2 DP2pppp
c1
c
d1
d
GV2
b
c
c1
d
d1
234
125 3
45
90
c1
c
DPp02pp to
DPp08pp
176.4
105.6
100.1
100.5
95
DPp10pp to
DPp32pp
186.8
111.9
106.4
100.5
95
GV2
DPp02pp to
DPp08pp
141.6
136.5
c
c1
DPp10pp to
DPp32pp
147.9
142.4
231
120
+3
0
138
136
119
141
120
136
55
141
(1) For several side-by-side motor starters, the maximum current allowed is equal to the nominal current under 400 V.
Example: 55 A for a 30 kW motor under 400 V, for a GV3 P65 circuit-breaker and a LC1 D65A contactor association.
(2) The maximum current allowed is equal to 90 % of maximum current. Example: 45 A for a LC1 D50A contactor.
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/13
1/14
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
13/NO
21/NC
14
22
A2
A1
21/NC
22
A2
14
A1
13/NO
5/L3
T3/6
W
13/NO
14
13/NO
14
3/L2
5/L3
T3/6
T2/4
3/L2
T2/4
13/NO
14
1/L1
A1
5/L3
T3/6
T1/2
A2
3/L2
T2/4
GV2 DM2pppp
1/L1
5/L3
3/L2
4
T1/2
21/NC
22
L3 6/T3
5
13/NO
6
14
L2 4/T2
1/L1
5/L3
GV2 DM1pppp
L1 2/T1
6/T3
5/L3
T3/6
3/L2
1/L1
T1/2
A1
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
GV2 MEppK1pp
A1
7
1
A2
4/T2
3/L2
6
T2/4
1/L1
2/T1
3
A2
1/L1
A1
T1/2
A2
Schemes
GV2 MEppK2pp
Schemes (continued)
5/L3
A1
A2
21/NC
22
13/NO
14
3
4
1
2
A2
21/NC
22
5
6
13/NO
3
4
L3 6/T3
14
3/L2
L1 2/T1
A1
2
21/NC
22
T3/6
T2/4
T1/2
A2
L2 4/T2
1/L1
5/L3
6/T3
5/L3
13/NO
14
4/T2
3/L2
2/T1
3/L2
GV2 DP2pppp
A1
1/L1
1/L1
GV2 DP1pppp
A2
A1
A2
02
01
01
A1
KM2
02
KM1
A1
01
02
01
A1
A1
Control circuit c
A1
Control circuit a
KM1
KM2
A2
A2
KM2
A2
A2
02
KM1
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/15
Combination starters
for customer assembly
Circuit-breaker
Reference
440 V
500 V
Contactor
Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference (2)
Ie
Iq (1)
Ie
Iq (1)
Ie
Iq (1)
kW
kA
kW
kA
kW
kA
0.06
0.2
50
0.06
0.19
50
GV2 ME02
0.160.25
0.09
0.3
50
0.09
0.12
0.28
0.37
50
50
GV2 ME03
0.250.40
0.12
0.18
0.44
0.6
50
50
0.18
0.55
50
GV2 ME04
0.400.63
0.25
0.37
0.85
1.1
50
50
0.25
0.37
0.76
0.99
50
50
GV2 ME05
0.631
0.55
1.5
50
0.55
1.36
50
0.37
0.55
0.88
1.2
50
50
GV2 ME06
11.6
0.75
1.5
50
GV2 ME06
11.6
0.75
1.9
50
0.75
1.1
1.68
2.37
50
50
1.1
2.2
50
GV2 ME07
1.6.2.5
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
50
50
1.5
3.06
50
1.5
2.2
2.9
3.9
5050
GV2 ME08
2.54
2.2
4.9
50
2.2
3
4.42
5.77
50
50
5.2
50
GV2 ME10
46.3
3
4
6.5
8.5
50
50
7.9
15
4
5.5
6.8
9.2
10
10
GV2 ME14
610
5.5
11.5
15
5.5
10.4
7.5
12.4
GV2 ME16
914
7.5
15.5
15
7.5
9
13.7
16.9
8
8
13.9
GV2 ME20
1318
LC1 D18
18.1
15
11
20.1
11
17.6
GV2 ME21
1723
LC1 D25
11
22
15
15
23
GV2 ME22
2025
LC1 D25
15
29
10
15
26.5
18.5
28
GV2 ME32
2432
LC1 D32
18.5
35
50
18.5
32.8
50
22
33
10
GV3 P40
3040
LC1 D40A
22
41
50
22
39
50
30
44
10
GV3 P50
3750
LC1 D50A
37
55
50
37
51.5
50
37
53
10
GV3 P65
4865
LC1 D65A
37
64
25
45
64
18
GV7 RE80
4880
LC1 D65A
37
66
15
45
76
10
55
78
GV3 ME80
5680
LC1 D80
37
66
25
45
76
25
55
78
18
GV7 RE80
4880
LC1 D80
45
80
25
GV7 RE100
60100
LC1 D95
50
90
25
GV7 RE100
60100
LC1 D115
55
97
25
75
106
30
GV7 RE150
90150
LC1 D115
75
132
35
75
125
35
90
128
30
GV7 RE150
90150
LC1 D150
90
146
35
GV7 RE150
90150
LC1 F185
90
160
35
110
156
30
GV7 RE220
132220
LC1 F185
110
178
35
132
160
184
224
30
30
GV7 RE220
132220
LC1 F265
110
195
35
132
215
35
GV7 RE220
132220
LC1 F225
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
)RUUHYHUVLQJRSHUDWLRQUHSODFHWKHSUH[/&ZLWK/&
10
1/16
Combination starters
for customer assembly
Circuit-breaker
Reference
440 V
500 V
Contactor
Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference (2)
Ie
Iq (1)
Ie
Iq (1)
Ie
Iq (1)
kW
kA
kW
kA
kW
kA
0.06
0.2
130
0.06
0.19
130
0.160.25
LC1 D09
0.09
0.3
130
0.09
0.12
0.28
0.37
130
130
0.250.4
LC1 D09
0.12
0.18
0.44
0.6
130
130
0.18
0.55
130
0.40.63
LC1 D09
0.25
0.37
0.85
1.1
130
130
0.25
0.37
0.76
0.99
130
130
0.631
LC1 D09
0.55
1.5
130
0.55
1.36
130
0.37
0.55
0.88
1.2
130
130
11.6
LC1 D09
0.75
1.5
130
11.6
LC1 D09
0.75
1.9
130
0.75
1.1
1.68
2.37
130
130
1.1
2.2
130
1.62.5
LC1 D09
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
130
130
1.5
3.06
130
1.5
2.2
2.9
3.9
130
130
2.54
LC1 D09
2.2
4.9
130
46.3
LC1 D09
2.2
3
4.42
5.77
50
50
5.2
50
GV2 ME10
46.3
LC1 D09
2.2
3
4.42
5.77
130
130
5.2
130
GV2 P10
46.3
LC1 D09
3
4
6.5
8.5
130
130
610
LC1 D09
7.9
15
4
5.5
6.8
9.2
10
10
GV2 ME14
610
LC1 D09
7.9
130
4
5.5
6.8
9.2
50
50
GV2 P14
610
LC1 D12
5.5
11.5
130
5.5
7.5
10.4
13.7
50
50
7.5
9
12.4
13.9
42
42
914
LC1 D25
7.5
15.5
50
16.9
20
1318
LC1 D25
18.1
50
11
20.1
20
11
17.6
10
1723
LC1 D25
11
22
50
2025
LC1 D25
15
23
10
GV2 P22
2025
LC1 D32
15
29
35
15
26.5
25
18.5
28
10
2540
LC1 D32
18.5
35
50
GV3 P40
3040
LC1 D50A
18.5
32.8
50
22
33
10
GV3 P40
3040
LC1 D65A
22
41
50
GV3 P50
3750
LC1 D50A
22
39
50
30
44
10
GV3 P50
3750
LC1 D65A
37
55
50
37
51.5
50
GV3 P65
4865
LC1 D65A
37
53
10
GV3 P65
4865
LC1 D80
22
39
65
GV7 RS40
2540
LC1 D80
30
44
50
GV7 RS50
3050
LC1 D80
37
53
50
GV7 RS80
4880
LC1 D80
22
41
70
GV7 RS50
3050
LC1 D80
30
55
70
30
51.5
65
GV7 RS80
4880
LC1 D80
37
66
70
37
64
65
GV7 RS80
4880
LC1 D80
45
76
65
GV7 RS80
4880
LC1 D80
45
64
50
GV7 RS80
4880
LC1 D115
55
78
50
GV7 RS80
4880
LC1 D115
45
80
70
55
90
65
GV7 RS100
60100
LC1 D115
55
75
97
132
70
70
75
90
125
146
65
65
90
128
50
GV7 RS150
90150
LC1 D150
90
160
70
110
178
65
110
156
50
GV7 RS220
132220
LC1 F185
110
195
70
132
215
65
GV7 RS220
132220
LC1 F225
132
160
184
224
50
50
GV7 RS220
132220
LC1 F265
10
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
(2) Combinations with circuit-breaker GV2 ME are type 2 coordinated only at 400/415 V and 440 V.
)RUUHYHUVLQJRSHUDWLRQUHSODFHWKHSUH[/&ZLWK/&
1/17
Combination starters
for customer assembly
440 V
Circuit-breaker
500 V
Ie
Iq
Ie
Iq
kW
Ie
Contactor
Reference
Rating
Irm (1)
Setting
range
Iq
kA
kW
kA
kW
kA
0.06
0.2
50
0.06
0.19
50
GV2 LE03
0.4
LC1 K06
LR2 K0302
0.160.23
0.09
0.28
50
GV2 LE03
0.4
LC1 K06
LR2 K0303
0.230.36
0.09
0.3
50
0.12
0.37
50
GV2 LE03
0.4
LC1 K06
LR2 K0304
0.360.54
0.12
0.44
50
GV2 LE04
0.63
LC1 K06
LR2 K0304
0.360.54
0.18
0.6
50
0.18
0.55
50
GV2 LE04
0.63
LC1 K06
LR2 K0305
0.540.8
0.25
0.76
50
GV2 LE05
13
LC1 K06
LR2 K0305
0.540.8
0.25
0.37
0.85
1.1
50
50
0.37
50
0.37
0.88
50
GV2 LE05
13
LC1 K06
LR2 K0306
0.81.2
0.55
1.5
50
0.55
1.36
50
0.55
0.75
1.2
1.5
50
50
GV2 LE06
1.6
22.5
LC1 K06
LR2 K0307
1.21.8
0.75
1.68
50
GV2 LE07
2.5
33.5
LC1 K06
LR2 K0307
1.21.8
0.75
1.1
1.9
2.7
50
50
1.1
2.37
50
1.1
2.2
50
GV2 LE07
2.5
33.5
LC1 K06
LR2 K0308
1.82.6
1.5
3.6
50
1.5
3.06
50
1.5
2.9
50
GV2 LE08
51
LC1 K06
LR2 K0310
2.63.7
2.2
3.9
50
GV2 LE08
51
LC1 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
2.2
4.9
50
2.2
4.4
50
5.2
50
GV2 LE10
6.3
78
LC1 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
5.77
50
GV2 LE10
6.3
78
LC1 K06
LR2 K0314
5.58
7.9
15
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC1 K09
LR2 K0314
5.58
6.5
50
6.8
10
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC1 K09
LR2 K0314
5.58
8.5
50
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC1 K09
LR2 K0316
811.5
5.5
11.5
15
5.5
10.4
7.5
12.4
GV2 LE16
14
170
LC1 K12
LR2 K0321
1014
7.5
13.7
13.9
GV2 LE16
14
170
LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
7.5
15.5
15
16.9
GV2 LE20
18
223
LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
18.1
15
11
17.6
GV2 LE22
25
327
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
11
22
15
11
20.1
15
23
GV2 LE22
25
327
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
15
29
10
15
26.5
18.5
28
GV2 LE32
32
416
LC1 D32
LRD 32
2332
18.5
35
50
18.5
32.5
50
22
33
10
GV3 L40
40
560
LC1 D40A
LRD 340
3040
22
41
50
22
39
50
30
44
10
GV3 L50
50
700
LC1 D50A
LRD 350
3750
10
1/18
Combination starters
for customer assembly
(continued)
440 V
Circuit-breaker
500 V
Contactor
Reference
Rating
Irm (1)
Setting
range
Ie
Iq
Ie
Iq
Ie
kW
kA
kW
kA
kW
Iq
kA
37
55
50
37
51.5
50
37
53
10
GV3 L65
65
910
LC1 D65A
LRD 365
4865
37
64
50
37
53
10
GV3 L65
65
910
LC1 D65A
LRD 365
4865
45
64
50
GV3 L65
65
910
LC1 D80
LRD 3361
4865
37
66
70
45
76
65
55
78
25
NS80HMA
80
1040
LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
80
(3)
NS100pMA (3)
100
1300
LC1 D95
LRD 3365
80104
50
90
(3)
NS100pMA (3)
100
1200
LC1 D115
LRD 4365
80104
75
106
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1500
LC1 D115
LRD 4367
95120
55
97
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1350
LC1 D115
LRD 4367
95120
75
132
(3)
75
125
(3)
90
128
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1800
LC1 D150
LRD 4369
110140
90
146
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1950
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
90
160
(3)
110
156
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2200
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
195
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2640
LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
110
178
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2420
LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
132
184
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2640
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
132220
132
215
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2860
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
132220
132
230
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
3200
LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
224
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
2860
LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
256
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
3520
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
160
280
(3)
200
321
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
4160
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
200
280
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
3840
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
220
310
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
4160
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
200
350
(3)
220
353
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
5000
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
250
401
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
5550
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
250
344
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
5000
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
220
388
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
5500
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
250
430
(3)
280
470
(3)
315
432
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
6000
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
355
488
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
6500
LC1 F500
LR9 F7381
380630
NS100pMA
400/415 V
25
70
36
70
70
130
440 V
25
65
35
65
65
130
500 V
18
50
30
50
50
70
660/690 V
10
10
20
35
Code
10
1/19
Combination starters
for customer assembly
(continued)
440 V
Circuit-breaker
500 V
Ie
Iq
Ie
kW
Iq
Ie
Contactor
Reference
Setting
range
Iq
kA
kW
kA
kW
kA
0.06
0.2
130
0.06
0.19
130
0.4
LC1 D09
LRD 02
0.160.25
0.09
0.3
130
0.09
0.12
0.28
0.37
130
130
0.4
LC1 D09
LRD 03
0.250.40
0.12
0.18
0.44
0.6
130
130
0.18
0.55
130
0.63
LC1 D09
LRD 04
0.40.63
0.25
0.37
0.85
1.1
130
130
0.25
0.37
0.76
0.99
130
130
13
LC1 D09
LRD 05
0.631
0.37
0.88
130
13
LC1 D09
LRD 06
11.7
0.55
1.5
130
0.55
1.36
130
0.55
0.75
1.2
1.5
130
130
1.6
22.5
LC1 D09
LRD 06
11.7
0.75
1.9
130
0.75
1.68
130
1.1
2.2
130
2.5
33.5
LC1 D09
LRD 07
1.62.5
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
130
130
1.1
2.37
130
1.5
2.2
2.9
3.9
130
130
51
LC1 D09
LRD 08
2.54
1.5
3.06
130
51
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
2.2
4.9
130
5.2
13
6.3
78
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
2.2
3
4.42
5.77
50
50
5.2
50
GV2 LE10
6.3
78
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
2.2
3
4.42
5.77
130
130
5.2
130
GV2 L10
6.3
78
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
6.5
130
10
10
LC1 D09
LRD 12
5.58
6.8
10
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC1 D12
LRD 12
5.58
6.8
50
GV2 L14
10
138
LC1 D12
LRD 12
5.58
8.5
130
10
138
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
7.9
15
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
7.9
130
GV2 L14
10
138
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
9.2
10
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
9.2
50
GV2 L14
10
138
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
11.5
130
5.5
10.4
50
7.5
12.4
42
GV2 L16
14
170
LC1 D25
LRD 16
913
7.5
13.7
50
GV2 L16
14
170
LC1 D25
LRD 21
1218
7.5
15.5
50
16.9
20
13.9
42
GV2 L20
18
223
LC1 D25
LRD 21
1218
9
11
18.1
22
50
50
11
20.1
20
GV2 L22
25
327
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
11
15
17.6
23
10
10
GV2 L22
25
327
LC1 D32
LRD 22
1624
15
29
50
15
26.5
50
GV3 L32
32
448
LC1 D40A
LRD 332
2332
18.5
28
10
GV3 L32
32
448
LC1 D65A
LRD 332
2332
10
1/20
Combination starters
for customer assembly
(continued)
440 V
Circuit-breaker
500 V
Reference
Contactor
Reference (2)
Reference
Setting
range
Ie
Iq
Ie
Iq
Ie
kW
kA
kW
kA
kW
Iq
kA
18.5
35
50
GV3 L40
40
560
LC1 D50A
LRD 340
3040
18.5
32.5
50
GV3 L40
40
560
LC1 D65A
LRD 340
3040
22
41
50
GV3 L50
50
700
LC1 D50A
LRD 350
3750
22
39
50
30
44
10
GV3 L50
50
700
LC1 D65A
LRD 350
3750
37
55
50
37
51.5
50
GV3 L65
65
910
LC1 D65A
LRD 365
4865
37
64
50
37
53
10
GV3 L65
65
910
LC1 D80
LRD 3359
4865
37
66
70
45
76
65
NS80HMA
80
1000
LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
55
78
(3)
NS100pMA (3)
100
1040
LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
80
(3)
55
90
(3)
NS100pMA (3)
100
1300
LC1 D115
LR9 D5367
60100
55
97
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1500
LC1 D115
LR9 D5369
90150
75
106
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1050
LC1 D115
LR9 D5369
90150
75
132
(3)
75
125
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1950
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
90
146
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1950
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
90
128
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1200
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
90
160
(3)
110
178
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2420
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
156
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
1540
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
195
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2860
LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
132
215
(3)
132
184
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2200
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
132220
132
230
(3)
160
256
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
3520
LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
224
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
2200
LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
280
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
4000
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
200
321
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
4000
LC1 F330
LR9 F7379
300500
200
280
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
3500
LC1 F400
LR9 F7375
200330
220
310
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
3500
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
200
350
(3)
220
250
353
401
(3)
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
5500
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
250
315
344
432
(3)
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
4500
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
220
250
388
430
(3)
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
6250
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
355
488
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
5000
LC1 F630
LR9 F7381
380630
400/415 V
NS100pMA
25
70
36
70
70
130
440 V
25
65
35
65
65
130
500 V
18
50
30
50
50
70
660/690 V
10
10
20
35
Code
10
1/21
Combination starters
for customer assembly
aM fuses
400/415 V
Reference
Size
Rating
Ie
kW
440 V
500 V
Ie
kW
Ie
kW
Contactor
Reference (2)
Reference
Setting
range
0.06
0.2
0.06
0.19
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0302
0.160.23
0.09
0.28
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0303
0.230.36
0.09
0.12
0.3
0.44
0.12
0.37
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0304
0.360.54
0.18
0.6
0.18
0.25
0.55
0.76
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0305
0.540.8
0.25
0.37
0.85
1.1
0.37
0.37
0.88
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0306
0.81.2
0.55
1.5
0.55
0.75
1.36
1.68
0.55
0.75
1.2
1.5
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0307
1.21.8
0.75
1.1
1.9
2.7
1.1
2.37
1.1
1.5
2.2
2.9
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0308
1.82.6
1.5
3.6
1.5
3.06
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0310
2.63.7
2.2
4.9
2.2
3
3.9
5.2
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
2.2
4.42
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
6.5
5.77
6.8
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K09
LR2 K0314
5.58
8.5
7.9
5.5
9.2
LS1 D32
10 x 38
12
LC1 K09
LR2 K0316
811.5
10
1/22
Combination starters
for customer assembly
(continued)
aM fuses
400/415 V
Reference
Size
Rating
440 V
500 V
Ie
Ie
Ie
kW
kW
kW
Contactor
Reference (2)
Reference
Setting
range
5.5
11.5
5.5
10.4
7.5
12.4
LS1 D32
10 x 38
16
LC1 K12
LR2 K0321
1014
7.5
15.5
7.5
13.7
13.9
LS1 D32
10 x 38
16
LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
16.9
LS1 D32
10 x 38
20
LC1 D25
LRD 21
1218
9
11
18.1
22
11
20.1
11
15
17.6
23
GK1 EK
14 x 51
25
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
15
29
15
26.5
18.5
28
GK1 EK
14 x 51
32
LC1 D32
LRD 32
2332
18.5
35
18.5
32.8
22
33
GK1 EK
14 x 51
40
LC1 D40
LRD 3355
3040
22
41
22
39
30
44
GK1 FK
22 x 58
50
LC1 D50
LRD 3357
3750
30
51.5
GK1 FK
22 x 58
80
LC1 D50
LRD 3359
4865
37
53
GK1 FK
22 x 58
80
LC1 D65
LRD 3359
4865
30
55
37
64
GK1 FK
22 x 58
80
LC1 D65
LRD 3361
5570
45
64
GK1 FK
22 x 58
80
LC1 D80
LRD 3361
5570
37 (3)
66
45
76
GK1 FK
22 x 58
100
LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
80
55
78
GK1 FK
22 x 58
100
LC1 D95
LRD 3365
8093
55
90
GK1 FK
22 x 58
125
LC1 D115
LRD 4365
80104
55
97
75
106
GK1 FK
22 x 58
125
LC1 D115
LRD 4367
95120
10
1/23
Combination starters
for customer assembly
(continued)
Switchdisconnector
aM fuses
400/415 V
Reference (1)
Size
Rating
GS1 DD
10 x 38
Ie
kW
0.06
0.2
440 V
500 V
Ie
kW
0.06
0.19
Ie
kW
Contactor
Reference (2)
Reference
Setting
range
LC1 D09
LRD 02
0.160.25
0.09
0.28
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 03
0.250.4
0.09
0.12
0.3
0.44
0.12
0.37
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 04
0.40.63
0.18
0.6
0.18
0.25
0.55
0.76
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 05
0.631
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.85
1.1
1.5
0.37
0.55
1
1.36
0.37
0.55
0.75
0.88
1.2
1.5
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 06
11.7
0.75
1.9
0.75
1.1
1.68
2.37
1.1
2.2
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 07
1.62.5
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
1.5
3.06
1.5
2.2
2.9
3.9
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 08
2.54
2.2
4.9
2.2
4.42
5.2
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
6.5
5.77
6.8
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 12
5.58
8.5
7.9
5.5
9.2
GS1 DD
10 x 38
10
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
11.5
5.5
10.4
7.5
12.4
GS1 DD
10 x 38
16
LC1 D12
LRD 16
913
7.5
15.5
7.5
13.7
13.9
GS1 DD
10 x 38
16
LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
16.9
GSp F
14 x 51
20
LC1 D25
LRD 21
1218
9
11
18.1
22
11
20.1
11
15
17.6
23
GSp F
14 x 51
25
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
15
29
15
26.5
18.5
28
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D32
LRD 32
2332
18.5
35
18.5
32.8
22
33
GSp F
14 x 51
40
LC1 D40A
LRD 340
3040
22
41
22
39
30
44
GSp J
22 x 58
50
LC1 D50A
LRD 350
3750
30
51.5
GSp J
22 x 58
80
LC1 D65A
LRD 365
4865
37
53
GSp J
22 x 58
80
LC1 D65A
LRD 365
4865
30
55
37
64
GSp J
22 x 58
80
LC1 D65A
LRD 365
4865
45
64
GSp J
22 x 58
80
LC1 D95
LRD 3361
5570
37
66
45
76
GSp J
22 x 58
100
LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
55
78
GSp J
22 x 58
100
LC1 D115
LR9 D5367
60100
45
80
GSp J
22 x 58
100
LC1 D95
LRD 3365
8093
55
97
55
90
75
106
GSp L
T0
125
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
75
132
75
125
90
128
GSp L
T0
160
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
90
160
90
146
110
156
GSp N
T1
200
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
195
110
178
132
184
GSp N
T1
250
LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
132
230
132
215
160
224
GSp QQ
T2
315
LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
256
GSp QQ
T2
315
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
160
280
200
321
200
280
GSp QQ
T2
400
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
220
310
GSp QQ
T2
400
LC1 F400
LR9 F7375
200330
200
220
350
388
220
353
250
344
GS2 S
T3
500
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
250
430
250
401
GS2 S
T3
500
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
315
355
432
488
GS2 S
T3
630
LC1 F500
LR9 F7381
380630
315
540
315
505
GS2 S
T3
630
LC1 F630
LR9 F7381
380630
355
400
549
611
400
552
GS2 V
T4
800
LC1 F630
LR9 F7381
380630
(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator.
(2))RUUHYHUVLQJRSHUDWLRQUHSODFHWKHSUH[/&ZLWK/&.
10
1/24
Combination starters
for customer assembly
(continued)
Switchdisconnector
aM fuses
Ie
Reference (1)
Size
kW
Rating
Contactor
Reference (2)
Reference
Setting range
A
0.75
1.1
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 06
11.6
1.1
1.6
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 06
11.6
1.5
2.1
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 07
1.62.5
2.2
2.8
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 08
2.54
3.8
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 08
2.54
4.9
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
5.5
6.7
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 12
5.58
7.5
8.9
GSp F
14 x 51
10
LC1 D25
LRD 16
913
11
12.8
GSp F
14 x 51
16
LC1 D25
LRD 16
913
15
17
GSp F
14 x 51
20
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
18.5
21
GSp F
14 x 51
25
LC1 D32
LRD 22
1624
22
24
GSp F
14 x 51
32
LC1 D40A
LRD 332
2332
30
32
GSp F
14 x 51
40
LC1 D40A
LRD 340
3040
37
39
GSp F
14 x 51
50
LC1 D65A
LRD 350
3750
45
47
GSp J
22 x 58
63
LC1 D80
LR2 D3357
3750
55
57
GSp J
22 x 58
80
LC1 D115
LR2 D3359
4865
75
77
GSp KK
T00
100
LC1 D115
LR2 D3363
6380
90
93
GSp KK
T00
125
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
110
113
GSp KK
T00
125
LC1 F185
LR9 D5369
90150
132
134
GSp L
T0
160
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
132220
160
162
GSp N
T1
200
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
132220
200
203
GSp N
T1
250
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
220
224
GSp QQ
T2
250
LC1 F400
LR9 F7375
200330
250
250
GSp QQ
T2
315
LC1 F400
LR9 F7375
200330
315
313
GSp QQ
T2
355
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
355
354
GSp QQ
T2
400
LC1 F630
LR9 F7379
300500
400
400
GS2 S
T3
500
LC1 F630
LR9 F7379
300500
(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator.
(2))RUUHYHUVLQJRSHUDWLRQUHSODFHWKHSUH[/&ZLWK/&.
10
1/25
Combination starters
for customer assembly
kW
Circuit-breaker
440 V
Ie
IrD (1)
Iq (2)
Reference
Ie
IrD (1)
Iq (2)
Star-delta
contactors
Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference
kA
kW
kA
1.5
3.6
50
1.5
3.06
1.8
50
GV2 ME08
A
2.54
LC3 K06
2.2
4.9
2.9
50
2.2
3
4.42
5.77
2.6
3.3
50
50
GV2 ME10
46.3
LC3 K06
3
4
6.5
8.5
3.8
4.9
50
50
7.9
4.6
15
GV2 ME14
610
LC3 K06
5.5
11.5
6.4
15
5.5
10.4
GV2 ME16
914
LC3 K06
7.5
15.5
8.6
15
7.5
13.7
7.9
GV2 ME20
1318
LC3 K09
16.9
9.8
GV2 ME20
1318
LC3 D12A
18.1
10
15
11
20.1
12
GV2 ME21
1723
LC3 D12A
11
22
12
15
GV2 ME22
2025
LC3 D12A
15
29
17
10
15
26.5
15
GV2 ME32
2432
LC3 D18A
18.5
35
20
50
18.5
32.8
19
50
GV3 P40
3040
LC3 D18A
22
39
23
50
GV3 P50
3750
LC3 D32A
22
41
24
50
30
51.5
30
50
GV3 P50
3750
LC3 D32A
30
55
33
50
30
51.5
30
50
GV3 P65
4865
LC3 D32A
37
66
40
50
37
64
37
50
GV3 P65
4865
37
66
40
25
37
64
37
25
GV7 RE80
4880
45
76
44
10
GV3 ME80
5680
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
45
76
44
25
GV7 RE80
4880
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
45
55
80
97
47
58
25
25
55
90
52
25
GV7 RE100
60100
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
75
132
78
35
75
125
72
35
GV7 RE150
90150
LC3 D80
90
146
84
35
GV7 RE150
90150
LC3 D115
90
110
160
195
95
115
35
35
110
178
103
35
GV7 RE220
132220
LC3 D115
132
215
124
35
GV7 RE220
132220
LC3 D150
10
1/26
Combination starters or
customer assembly
(continued)
Circuit-breaker
400/415 V
Reference
440 V
Iq (1)
Star-delta contactors
Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference
Ie
Iq
Ie
kW
kA
kW
kA
1.5
3.6
130
1.5
3.06
130
GV2 P08
2.54
2.2
4.9
130
2.2
4.42
130
GV2 P10
46.3
5.77
130
GV2 P10
4...6.3
6.5
130
GV2 P14
610
8.5
130
7.9
130
GV2 P14
610
5.5
11.5
130
5.5
10.4
50
GV2 P16
914
7.5
13.7
50
GV2 P16
914
7.5
15.5
50
16.9
20
GV2 P20
1318
18.1
50
11
20.1
20
GV2 P21
1723
11
22
50
GV2 P22
2025
15
29
50
15
26.5
50
GV3 P32
2332
18.5
35
50
GV3 P40
3040
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
18.5
32.8
50
GV3 P40
3040
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
22
41
50
GV3 P50
3750
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
22
39
50
GV3 P50
3750
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
30
55
50
30
51.5
50
GV3 P65
4865
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
37
66
70
37
64
65
GV7 RS80
4880
45
76
65
GV7 RS80
4880
45
80
70
GV7 RS100
60100
55
97
70
55
90
65
GV7 RS100
60100
75
132
70
75
125
65
GV7 RS150
90150
90
146
65
GV7 RS150
90150
90
160
70
110
178
65
GV7 RS220
132220
110
195
70
132
215
65
GV7 RS220
132220
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
(2) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D09, star-delta starter kit LAD 91217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D18 or LC1 D25, star-delta starter kit LAD 93217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(4) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(5) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D80, star-delta starter kit LA9 D8017 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(6) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D115 or LC1 D150, see page 1/41
(7) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 F185 or LC1 F225, see pages 1/47 and 1/49
10
1/27
Combination starters
for customer assembly
Circuit-breaker
440 V
Reference
Ie
IrD (1)
Iq
Ie
IrD (1) Iq
kW
kA
kW
kA
1.5
3.6
50
1.5
2.2
3.06
4.42
1.8
3
50
50
2.2
4.9
50
5.77
50
GV2 LE10
6.5
50
GV2 LE14
7.9
50
GV2 LE10
8.5
50
5.5
10.4
5.5
11.5
15
7.5
7.5
15.5
15
18.1
11
Star-delta
contactors
Reference
Reference
Setting
range
51
LC3 K06
LR2 K0308
1.82.6
6.3
78
LC3 K06
LR2 K0310
2.63.7
10
138
LC3 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
6.3
78
LC3 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC3 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
15
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC3 K06
LR2 K0314
5.58
GV2 LE16
14
170
LC3 K06
LR2 K0314
5.58
13.7
GV2 LE16
14
170
LC3 K09
LR2 K0316
811.5
GV2 LE20
18
223
LC3 K09
LR2 K0316
811.5
16.9
GV2 LE16
14
170
LC3 D12A
LRD 16
913
10
15
GV2 LE22
25
327
LC3 K12
LR2 K0316
811.5
11
20.1
12
GV2 LE20
18
223
LC3 K12
LR2 K0321
1014
22
12
15
GV2 LE22
25
327
LC3 K12
LR2 K0321
1014
15
26.5
15
GV2 LE22
25
327
LC3 D18A
LRD 21
1218
15
29
16
10
GV2 LE32
32
384
LC3 D18A
LRD 21
1218
18.5
35
20
50
18.5
32.8
19
50
GV3 L40
40
560
LC3 D18A
LRD 22
1624
22
41
24
50
22
39
23
50
GV3 L50
50
700
LC3 D32A
LRD 32
2332
30
51.5
30
50
GV3 L65
65
910
LC3 D32A
LRD 32
2332
30
55
33
50
GV3 L65
65
910
LC3 D32A
LRD 35
3038
37
64
37
50
GV3 L65
65
910
LRD 340
3040
45
76
44
65
NS80HMA
80
640
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 350
3750
55
90
52
65
NS80HMA
80
800
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 365
4865
4865
GV2 LE08
37
66
40
70
NS80HMA
80
640
LRD 365
75
125
72
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1200
LC3 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
80
47
(3)
NS100pMA (3)
100
800
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 350
3750
55
97
58
(3)
NS100pMA (3)
100
1200
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 365
4865
75
132
78
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1200
LC3 D80
LRD 3363
6380
90
146
85
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1200
LC3 D115
LRD 4365
80104
90
160
96
(3)
110
178
103
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
1760
LC3 D115
LRD 4365
80104
132
215
125
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
1760
LC3 D150
LRD 4369
110140
110140
110
195
116
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
1760
LC3 D115
LRD 4369
160
256
148
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
2240
LC3 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
200
321
186
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
3150
LC3 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
132
230
139
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
2240
LC3 D150
LRD 4369
110140
160
280
165
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
2560
LC3 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
200
350
204
(3)
220
353
204
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
3150
LC3 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
220
388
225
(3)
250
401
233
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
3500
LC3 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
280
480
278
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
4000
LC3 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
315
505
295
(3)
C801p+STR35ME
800
4000
LC3 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
315
540
322
(3)
355
518
300
(3)
C801p+STR35ME
800
4500
LC3 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
375
575
334
(3)
C801p+STR35ME
800
5000
LC3 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
10
NS100pMA
NS160pMA, NS250pMA
NS400pMA, NS630pMA
C801p+STR35ME
400/415 V
25
70
36
70
70
130
70
440 V
25
65
35
65
65
130
65
100
Code
1/28
150
Combination starters
for customer assembly
(continued)
Circuit-breaker
Iq
kA
130
Reference
Star-delta
contactors
Reference
GV2 L08
A
4
A
51
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 08
A
2.54
Reference
Setting
range
2.2
3
4.9
6.5
130
130
2.2
3
4
4.42
5.77
7.9
130
130
20
GV2 L10
6.3
78
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 10
46
GV2 L14
10
138
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 14
710
8.5
130
GV2 L14
10
138
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 16
913
5.5
11.5
50
5.5
10.4
20
GV2 L16
14
170
3 x LC1 D25
LRD 16
913
7.5
15.5
50
7.5
13.7
20
GV2 L20
18
223
3 x LC1 D25
LRD 21
1218
16.9
20
GV2 L22
25
327
3 x LC1 D25
LRD 21
1218
9
11
15
18.1
22
29
50
50
50
11
15
20.1
26.5
20
50
GV2 L22
25
327
3 x LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
GV3 L32
32
448
LRD 332
2332
18.5
35
50
GV3 L40
40
560
LRD 340
3040
18.5
32.8
50
GV3 L40
40
560
LRD 340
3040
22
41
50
GV3 L50
50
700
LRD 350
3750
22
39
50
GV3 L50
50
700
LRD 350
3750
30
55
50
30
51.5
50
GV3 L65
65
910
LRD 365
4865
37
64
50
GV3 L65
65
910
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
3 x LC1 D80
LRD 3359
4865
37
66
70
45
76
65
NS80HMA
80
640
3 x LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
80
(2)
55
90
(2)
NS100pMA (2)
100
800
3 x LC1 D115
LR9 D5367
60100
55
97
(2)
NS160pMA (2)
150
1200
3 x LC1 D115
LR9 D5369
90150
75
125
(2)
NS160pMA (2)
150
1200
3 x LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
75
132
(2)
90
146
(2)
NS160pMA (2)
150
1200
3 x LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
90
160
(2)
110
178
(2)
NS250pMA (2)
220
1760
3 x LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
195
(2)
NS250pMA (2)
220
1760
3 x LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
132
215
(2)
NS250pMA (2)
220
1760
3 x LC1 F225
LR9 F7375
200330
132
230
(2)
160
256
(2)
NS400pMA (2)
320
2240
3 x LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
280
(2)
NS400pMA (2)
320
2560
3 x LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
200
321
(2)
NS400pMA (2)
320
2880
3 x LC1 F330
LR9 F7379
300500
200
350
(2)
220
353
(2)
NS630pMA (2)
500
3150
3 x LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
220
388
(2)
250
401
(2)
NS630pMA (2)
500
3500
3 x LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
250
430
(2)
NS630pMA (2)
500
4000
3 x LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
1/29
10
Combination starters
for customer assembly
10
Fuse carrier
(basic block)
Reference
440 V
P
kW
1.5
Ie
A
3.06
IrD (1)
A
2
2.2
50
6.5
50
2.2
3
8.4
50
5.5
11
7.5
14.8
Star-delta
contactors
Reference
Size
Iq
kA
50
Reference
LS1 D32
A
10 x 38 4
LC3 K06
LR2 K0308
A
1.82.6
LS1 D32
10 x 38 6
LC3 K06
LR2 K0310
2.63.7
4.42
5.77
3
3
50
50
LS1 D32
LS1 D32
10 x 38 8
10 x 38 8
LC3 K06
LC3 K06
LR2 K0310
LR2 K0312
2.63.7
3.75.5
7.9
50
LS1 D32
10 x 38 12
LC3 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
50
5.5
10.4
50
LS1 D32
10 x 38 16
LC3 K06
LR2 K0314
5.58
50
7.5
13.7
50
LS1 D32
10 x 38 16
LC3 K09
LR2 K0316
811.5
18.1
10
100
16.9
10
50
LS1 D32
10 x 38 20
LC3 D12A
LRD 16
913
11
21
12
100
11
20.1
12
100
GK1 EK
14 x 51 25
LC3 D12A
LRD 16
913
15
28.5
16
100
15
26.5
15
100
GK1 EK
14 x 51 32
LC3 D18A
LRD 21
1218
18.5
35
20
100
18.5
32.8
19
100
GK1 EK
14 x 51 40
LC3 D18A
LRD 22
1624
22
39
23
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 50
LC3 D18A
LRD 22
1624
22
42
24
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 50
LC3 D32A
LRD 32
2332
30
51.5
30
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 63
LC3 D32A
LRD 32
2332
30
57
33
100
37
64
37
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 80
LC3 D40
LRD 3355
3040
37
69
40
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 80
LC3 D40
LRD 3357
3750
45
76
44
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 80
LC3 D50
LRD 3357
3750
45
81
47
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 100
LC3 D50
LRD 3357
3750
55
90
52
100
GSp K
22 x 58 100
LC3 D50
LRD 3359
4865
55
100
58
100
GSp K
22 x 58 125
LC3 D50
LRD 3361
5570
75
135
78
100
75
125
72
100
GSp L
T0
160
LC3 D80
LRD 3363
6380
90
146
84
100
GSp L
T0
160
LC3 D115
LRD 4365
80104
90
165
95
100
GSp N
T1
200
LC3 D115
LRD 4367
95120
110
200
115
100
110
178
103
100
GSp N
T1
200
LC3 D115
LRD 4367
95120
132
240
139
100
132
215
124
100
GSp QQ
T2
250
LC3 D150
LRD 4369
110140
160
285
165
100
160
256
148
100
GSp QQ
T2
315
LC3 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
200
321
185
100
GSp QQ
T2
400
LC3 F225
LR9 F5369
132220
220
388
225
100
GSp QQ
T2
400
LC3 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
250
401
233
100
GS2 S
T3
500
LC3 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
280
480
278
100
GS2 S
T3
500
LC3 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
315
555
322
100
315
355
375
505
518
575
293
300
334
100
100
100
GS2 S
GS2 S
T3
T3
630
630
LC3 F330
LC3 F400
LR9 F7375
LR9 F7379
200330
300500
1/30
aM fuses
Rating
Combination starters
for customer assembly
SwitchaM fuses
disconnector-fuse
Reference
Size
Rating
Star-delta
contactors
Reference
Ie
A
3.06
Iq
kA
50
GS1 DD
10 x 38
A
4
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 08
A
2.54
2.2
50
2.2
4.42
50
GS1 DD
10 x 38
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
6.5
50
5.77
50
GS1 DD
10 x 38
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 12
5.58
8.4
50
7.9
50
GS1 DD
10 x 38
10
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
11
50
5.5
10.4
50
GS1 DD
10 x 38
16
3 x LC1 D12
LRD 16
913
7.5
14.8
50
7.5
13.7
50
GS1 DD
10 x 38
16
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
9
11
15
18.1
21
28.5
100
100
100
9
11
15
16.9
20.1
26.5
100
100
100
GSp F
GSp F
14 x 51
14 x 51
25
32
3 x LC1 D25
3 x LC1 D32
LRD 22
LRD 32
1624
2332
18.5
35
100
18.5
32.8
100
GSp F
14 x 51
40
3 x LC1 D40
LRD 3355
3040
22
42
100
22
39
100
GSp F
22 x 58
50
3 x LC1 D50
LRD 3357
3750
30
57
100
30
51.5
100
GSp J
22 x 58
80
3 x LC1 D65
LRD 3361
5570
37
69
100
37
64
100
GSp J
22 x 58
80
3 x LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
76
100
GSp J
22 x 58
80
3 x LC1 D80
LRD 3365
8093
45
81
100
GSp J
22 x 58
100
3 x LC1 D115
LR9 D5367
60100
55
90
100
GSp L
T0
125
3 x LC1 D115
LR9 D5369
90150
55
100
100
GSp L
T0
125
3 x LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
75
125
100
GSp L
T0
160
3 x LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
75
135
100
GSp L
T0
160
3 x LC1 F185
LR9 D5369
90150
90
165
100
90
146
100
GSp N
T1
200
3 x LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
200
100
110
178
100
GSp N
T1
250
3 x LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
132
240
100
132
215
100
GSp QQ
T2
315
3 x LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
285
100
160
256
100
GSp QQ
T2
315
3 x LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
200
321
100
GSp QQ
T2
400
3 x LC1 F330
LR9 F7379
300500
200
220
250
352
388
437
100
100
100
220
250
353
401
100
100
GS2 S
GS2 S
T3
T3
500
500
3 x LC1 F400
3 x LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
LR9 F7379
300500
300500
315
555
100
315
505
100
GS2 S
T3
630
3 x LC1 F630
LR9 F7381
380630
355
605
100
355
400
549
611
100
100
GS2 V
GS2 V
T4
T4
800
800
3 x LC1 F630
3 x LC1 F780
LR9 F7381
LR9 F7381
380630
380630
Reference
Setting
range
10
1/31
Combination starters
for customer assembly
440 V
500 V
Switchdisconnectorfuse
BS fuses
Contactor
Reference
Size
Rating
Reference (1)
Reference
Setting
range
Ie
Ie
Ie
kW
0.06
A
0.22
kW
0.06
A
0.19
kA
GS1 DDB
A1
A
NIT 2
LC1 D09
LRD 02
A
0.160.25
0.09
0.28
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 2
LC1 D09
LRD 03
0.250.4
0.09
0.12
0.36
0.42
0.12
0.37
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 2
LC1 D09
LRD 04
0.40.63
0.18
0.6
0.18
0.55
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 2
LC1 D09
LRD 05
0.631
0.25
0.76
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 4
LC1 D09
LRD 05
0.631
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.88
1
1.5
0.37
0.55
0.75
1
1.36
1.68
0.37
0.55
0.75
1
1.2
1.5
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 6
LC1 D09
LRD 06
11.7
0.75
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 10
LC1 D09
LRD 07
1.62.5
1.5
2.6
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 10
LC1 D09
LRD 08
2.54
1.5
3.5
1.5
3.06
2.2
3.8
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 16
LC1 D09
LRD 08
2.54
2.2
2.2
4.42
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 16
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
6.5
5.77
6.5
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20
LC1 D09
LRD 12
5.58
8.4
7.9
5.5
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
11
5.5
10.4
7.5
12
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20M25
LC1 D12
LRD 16
913
7.5
14
7.5
13.7
13.9
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20M32
LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
18.1
16.9
GS2 GB
A2
TIA 32M35
LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
11
21
11
20
11
15
18.4
23
GS2 GB
A2
TIA 32M50
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
15
28.5
15
26.5
GS2 GB
A2
TIA 32M63
LC1 D32
LRD 32
2332
22
33
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M80
LC1 D40
LRD 3355
3040
22
42
22
39
30
45
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M100
LC1 D50
LRD 3357
3750
30
51.5
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M100
LC1 D50
LRD 3359
4865
30
57
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M100
LC1 D65
LRD 3359
4865
45
76
45
65
GS2 LLB
A4
LRD 3363
6380
45
81
55
80
GS2 LLB
A4
LRD 3365
8093
55
100
GS2 LLB
A4
LR9 D5369
90150
55
90
GS2 LLB
A4
LR9 D5367
60100
80
116
GS2 LB
B2
TF 200
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
80
138
80
132
GS2 LB
B2
TF 200M250
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
100
110
143
156
GS2 LB
B2
TF 200M250
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
100
182
100
162
GS2 MMB
B2
TF 200M250
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
196
110
178
GS2 MMB
B2
TF 200M315
LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
140
200
GS2 NB
B3
TKF 315M355
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
132220
140
250
140
226
160
220
GS2 NB
B3
TKF 315M355
LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
285
160
256
GS2 QQB
B4
TKF 315M355
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
220
310
GS2 QQB
B4
TMF 400
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
220
388
220
353
257
362
GS2 QQB
B4
LR9 F7379
300500
270
380
GS2 SB
C2
TTM 500
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
257
270
450
460
257
270
412
433
GS2 SB
C2
TTM 500
LC1 F500
LR9 F7381
380630
375
610
375
577
375
425
508
556
GS2 SB
C2
TTM 630
LC1 F630
LR9 F7381
380630
)RUUHYHUVLQJRSHUDWLRQUHSODFHWKHSUH[/&ZLWK/&
10
1/32
Combination starters
for customer assembly
(continued)
440 V
Switchdisconnectorfuse
BS fuses
Contactor
Reference
Size
Rating
Reference
Reference
Setting
range
Ie
Iq
Ie
Iq
kW
1.5
A
3.5
kA
50
kW
1.5
A
3.06
kA
50
GS1 DDB
A1
A
NIT 16
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 08
A
2.54
2.2
50
2.2
4.42
50
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 16
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
6.5
50
5.77
50
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 12
5.58
8.4
50
7.9
50
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
11
50
5.5
10.4
50
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20M25
3 x LC1 D12
LRD 16
913
7.5
14.8
50
7.5
13.7
50
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20M32
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
18.1
50
16.9
50
GS2 GB
A2
TIA 32M35
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
11
21
50
11
20.1
50
GS2 GB
A2
TIA 32M50
3 x LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
15
28.5
50
15
26.5
50
GS2 GB
A2
TIA 32M63
3 x LC1 D32
LRD 32
2332
22
42
50
22
39
50
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M80
3 x LC1 D40
LRD 3355
3040
30
51.5
50
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M100
3 x LC1 D50
LRD 3359
4865
30
57
50
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M100
3 x LC1 D65
LRD 3359
4865
45
81
50
45
76
50
GS2 LLB
A4
LRD 3363
6380
55
100
80
55
90
80
GS2 LLB
A4
LR9 D5369
90150
80
138
80
80
132
80
GS2 LB
B2
TF 200M250
3 x LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
100
182
80
100
162
80
GS2 MMB
B2
TF 200M250
3 x LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
196
80
110
178
80
GS2 MMB
B2
TF 200M315
3 x LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
140
250
80
140
226
80
GS2 NB
B3
TFK 315M355
3 x LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
285
80
160
256
80
GS2 QQB
B3
TFK 315M355
3 x LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
220
388
80
220
353
80
GS2 QQB
B4
LR9 F7379
300500
257
270
450
460
80
80
257
270
412
433
80
80
GS2 SB
C2
TTM 500
3 x LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
375
610
80
375
577
80
GS2 SB
C2
TTM 630
3 x LC1 F630
LR9 F7381
380630
10
1/33
References
References
526459
LC4 D09App
500 V
kW
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
11
7.5
Fuses to be
WWHGE\WKH
customer
Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)
Weight
660 V
690 V
kW
Operational
current
440 V up
to
A
9
Size
Type
aM
A
10 x 38 12
LC4 D09App
kg
0.870
7.5
12
10 x 38 16
LC4 D12App
0.870
10
18
10 x 38 20
LC4 D18App
1.150
11
11
15
25
10 x 38 25
LC4 D25App
1.580
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
32
14 x 51 32
LC4 D32App
2.630
11
18.5
22
22
22
30
40
14 x 51 40
LC4 D40pp
2.930
15
22
25
30
30
33
50
22 x 58 63
LC4 D50pp
3.200
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
65
22 x 58 80
LC4 D65pp
3.340
22
37
45
45
55
45
80
22 x 58 80
LC4 D80pp
3.650
6SHFLFDWLRQV
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections.
3-pole isolating device
(1) Thermal overload relay to be ordered separately (see pages 6/20 to 6/23).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages.
Volts
24
50/60 Hz B7
42
D7
48
E7
110
F7
220
M7
)RURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
10
Dimensions :
page 1/35
1/34
Schemes :
page 1/35
230
P7
240
U7
380
Q7
400
V7
415
N7
440
R7
Dimensions,
schemes
Dimensions
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, pre-assembled
LC4 D09AD25A
98
LC4
b
c1
without cover or add-on blocks
with cover, without add-on blocks
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts)
with LA6 DK10
with LAD T, R, S
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover
50
33
110
173
63
79
D09AD18A
218
94
96
127
139
147
151
D25A
221
100
102
133
145
153
157
3
c1
55
71
86
LC4
c1
without cover or add-on blocks
with cover, without add-on blocks
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts)
with LA6 DK10
with LAD T, R, S
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover
D32A
100
102
133
145
153
157
36
110
124
LC4 D32A
88
c1
=
90
165
60
b1
100/110
LC4 D40D80
c
c1
G
a
c2
LC4
a
b
b1
c
c1
without cover or add-on blocks
with cover, without add-on blocks
with LA1 DN (1 contact)
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts)
with LA6 DK
with LAD T, R, S
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover
c2
G
D40D65
281
143
45
130
124
129
149
157
169
177
181
100
263
D80
311
143
48
140
135
140
160
168
180
188
192
178
293
Scheme
D.O.L. starters
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
- Q1
10
- KM1
References :
page 1/34
1/35
Presentation
Star-delta starting
Current
7
6
5
1
4
3
2
2
1
0
0,25
0,50
0,75
1
Speed
Current
2,5
1
1,5
(1)
2
0,5
3
0
0,25
0,50
0,75
1
Speed
10
1/36
References
DF526460
LC3 D32A
D32App
pp
delta
KM3
Star delta
mechanical
interlock
Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)
Weight
star
KM1
kW
4
kW
7.5
kW
7.5
kW
7.5
(3)
With
LC3 D09App
kg
1.530
5.5
11
11
11
(3)
With
LC3 D12App
1.530
11
18.5
22
22
(3)
With
LC3 D18App
1.730
15
25
30
30
(3)
With
LC3 D32App
2.030
18.5
37
37
37
(3)
Without
With
LC3 D40pp
LC3 D40ppA64
4.360
4.500
30
55
59
59
(3)
(3)
Without
With
LC3 D50pp
LC3 D50ppA64
4.360
4.500
37
75
75
75
(3)
(3)
Without
With
LC3 D80pp
LC3 D80ppA64
5.200
5.400
63
110
110
110
(3)
(3)
Without
11.800
With
12.100
Without
12.100
With
12.100
Star delta
mechanical
interlock
Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)
75
132
132
147
(3)
1 (3)
415 V
440 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
Auxiliary contacts
available on each contactor
line
KM2
delta
KM3
Weight
star
KM1
kg
5.5
5.5
5.5
With
LC3 K06pp
0.740
7.5
7.5
7.5
With
LC3 K09pp
0.740
7.5
7.5
7.5
(3)
With
LC3 D090App
1.530
5.5
11
11
11
(3)
With
LC3 D120App
1.530
11
18.5
22
22
(3)
With
LC3 D180App
1.730
15
25
30
30
(3)
With
LC3 D320App
2.030
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload
0 to 6/23).
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current (see pages 6/20
(2) Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts a 50/60 Hz
24
36
42
48
110
220
230
240
380
400
415
440
Star-delta starters LC3 K06 and K09
Code
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
)RURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
(3) One auxiliary contact block type LAD N FDQ DOVR EH WWHG VHH SDJH 5/79.
(4) These starters consist of contactors LC1 D115
5 or D150 without connectors.
Dimensions :
pages 1/42 and 1/43
Schemes :
page 1/43
1/37
10
KM2
3
a
1b
1c
5
KM1
KM3
KM1
KM3
KM2
8
1b
10
a
1/38
1c
1a
References
9
9
11
11
15
15
Thermal-magnetic
motor
circuit-breaker
Contactors
(basic references, to be completed
by adding the voltage code) (4)
GV2 ME20
GV2 ME20
GV2 ME21
GV2 ME22
GV2 ME32
line
KM2
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D18pp
delta
KM3
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D18pp
star
KM1
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
Illustration
item no.
a
Reference
Separate component
Description
Mounting kit comprising:
power circuit connections and
1 time delay contact block LAD S2
Weight
kg
0.130
LAD 912GV
7.5
11
18.5
25
37
55
75
110
132
7.5
11
22
30
37
59
75
110
132
7.5
11
22
30
37
59
75
110
147
Contactors
(basic references, to be completed
by adding the voltage code) (4)
Separate
components
(see below)
line
KM2
delta
KM3
star
KM1
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D18pp (6)
LC1 D25pp (7)
LC1 D32pp
LC1 D40pp
LC1 D50pp
LC1 D80pp
LC1 D115pp
LC1 D150pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D25pp (7)
LC1 D32pp
LC1 D40pp
LC1 D50pp
LC1 D80pp
LC1 D115pp
LC1 D150pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D18pp
LC1 D40pp
LC1 D40pp
LC1 D50pp
LC1 D80pp
LC1 D115pp
Illustration
item no.
For components
type (5)
D09 and D12
Reference
LAD 91217
Weight
kg
0.180
LAD 93217
0.310
LA9 D5017
0.380
D80
LA9 D8017
0.680
LA9 D12974
LA9 D32974
LA9 D40973
LA9 D80973
0.150
0.180
0.300
0.300
Component
types
D09
D12
D18
D32
D40
D50
D80
D115 (5)
D150 (5)
Separate components
Description
Mounting kit comprising:
- 1 time delay contact block LAD S2
(D09D80) (3),
- power circuit connections (D09D80),
- VFUHZVDQGFODPSVIRU[LQJFRQWDFWRUV
to the plate (D40D80).
1a
1b
1c
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/23.
(2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment.
(3) See comments on page 1/36.
(4) See page 5/62.
(5) For LC1 D115 and LC1 D150 components, see illustration and separate parts on pages 1/40 and 1/41.
(6) A LC1 D12 component is adequate for the application, but use of a LC1 D18 is recommended.
(connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
(7) A LC1 D18 component is adequate for the application, but use of a LC1 D25 is recommended.
(connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
10
Illustrations :
page 1/38
Dimensions :
pages 1/42 and 1/43
Schemes :
page 1/43
1/39
13
12
11
10
2
14
6
10
1/40
References (continued)
Illustration For
item no.
use on
LC1
No. Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Instantaneous
auxiliary contact
blocks 1 N/O
Control relay
D115
(star)
LAD N10
0.020
D115, D150
0.320
Time delay
auxiliary
contact blocks
Lead sealing kit
for time delay
auxiliary
contact blocks
Thermal magnetic
circuit-breaker for
control circuit
(200415 V)
Set of 3
connectors for
wider terminations
(optional)
Set of power
connections with
[LQJDFFHVVRULHV
D115, D150
LAD T2
0.060
D115, D150
LA9 D901
0.005
D115, D150
GB2 CB05
0.060
D115, D150
LA9 FG980
0.200
D115
LA9 D11517
0.800
D150
LA9 D15017
1.050
D115, D150
10
DZ3 HA3
0.007
10
DZ3 GA3
0.006
Lug-connector
terminal block
End stop
10
D115, D150
10
AB1 BC9535
0.236
11
D115, D150
100
AB1 AB8M35
0.005
Mounting rail
5 35 mm
Pre-slotted
mounting plate
Screw with
captive washer
12
D115, D150
10
AM1 ED021
0.210
13
D115, D150
AM3 PA65
1.950
14
D115, D150
12
100
AF1 VA618
0.006
100
AF1 VA410
0.002
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered
separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor
current, see pages 6/20 to 6/23.
(2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the
equipment.
(3) See page 7/21.
10
Illustrations :
page 1/40
Dimensions :
pages 1/42 and 1/43
Schemes :
page 1/43
1/41
Dimensions
Dimensions
Star-delta starters
Plate mounted, pre-assembled
Pre-assembled:
KM1
110
KM3
KM2
110
LC3 D09AD32A
For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D09 to D32
110
LC3 K
124
150
175
90
LC3
a
b
c
with LAD S
with LAD S and sealing cover
D09A
143
26.5
139
143
D12A
143
26.5
139
143
D18A
144
26.5
139
143
D32A
165
32.5
145
149
60
143
45
47
60
100/110
143
175 (1)
263
183 (1)
281
9
G
10
LC3 D115 or 3 x LC1 D with components
LC3 D150 or 3 x LC1 D with components
References :
pages 1/37 to 1/41
1/42
D115
D150
Schemes :
pages 1/43
293
311
a
450
450
b
555
555
100/110
94
c
205
205
G
425
425
H
525
525
Dimensions (continued),
schemes
Star-delta starters
Dimensions (continued)
2x7
KM1
KM3
KM2
D090A D180A
153
139
143
LC3
b
c
with LAD S
with LAD S and sealing cover
160
175
D320A
137
145
149
Schemes
LC3 D
KM3/5
95
KM3/5
14
13
13 22
KM2
21
KM1
KM2
21 67
KM1
KM3/1
KM3
A2
KM2
A2
KM1
A1
A1 22
A1 22
KM3
KM2
A2
A2
KM3
A2
A2
A1
A1
A1 16
A1
W2
V2
U2
KM2/1 (N)
KM1
KM2
68
55 14
22
21
KM1
A2
22
13 14
14
15
W1
V1
U1
W2
V2
KM3
U2
(2)
W1
V1
U1
KM1
54
53
(1)
KM2
13
KM1
KM3
KM2
21 56
5
6
21 96
3
4
O
96
1
2
95
L2
LC3 K
L3
L1
Note: LC3 D09A to D18A: Mechanical interlock between KM3 and KM1.
95
67
153
172
68
55 183
171
KM1
KM2
13
A1 14
KM3
A2
A1
KA1
A2
KM2
KA1
A1154
KM2
A1 162
KM1
A2
F2
153
KM3
A2
5
6
3
4
KM1
161 56
W2
W1
U1
V1
V2
U2
Recommended
cabling for reversal
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from shaft
end).
KM2
KM1
14
184 154
13
W2
V2
U2
(2)
22
21 96
W1
2
U1
O
2
F1
F1
KM1
2
KM3
KM2
V1
L3
L2
L1
(1) Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
(2) Remote control.
References :
pages 1/37 to 1/41
1/43
10
Presentation
Star-delta starting
Current
7
6
5
1
4
3
2
2
1
0
0,25
0,50
0,75
1
Speed
Current
2,5
1
1,5
(1)
2
0,5
3
0
0,25
0,50
0,75
1
Speed
10
1/44
References
Star-delta starters
Standard power ratings
of squirrel cage motors
Mains voltage delta connection
220/ 380/
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
delta
KM3
Star delta
mechanical
interlock
Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)
Without
LC3 F185pp
kg
16.500
With
LC3 F185ppA64
16.625
Without
LC3 F225pp
16.500
With
LC3 F225ppA64
16.625
Without
LC3 F265pp
27.300
With
LC3 F265ppA64
27.425
Without
LC3 F330pp
37.000
With
LC3 F330ppA64
37.125
Without
LC3 F400pp
37.000
With
LC3 F400ppA64
37.125
Weight
(3)
511080
kW
90
100
110
LC3 FpppppA64
160
185
kW
160
200
220
280
315
kW
160
200
220
280
355
kW
185
220
250
315
375
star
KM1
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts a 50/60 Hz
48
110
115
Code
E7
F7
FE7
)RURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
2QHDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWEORFNW\SH/$'1FDQEHWWHG
220/230
M7
230
P7
240
U7
380/400
Q7
400
V7
415
N7
10
Presentation :
page 1/44
Dimensions :
page 1/50
Schemes :
page 1/51
1/45
1
*
3
7
1
7
KM1
KM3
KM2
6
7
*
*
10
See page 1/48
1/46
References
line
delta
star
Separate
components
(see below)
440 V
kW
185
KM2
LC1 F185pp
KM3
LC1 F185pp
KM1
LC1 D150pp
Component types
F185
100
200
200
220
LC1 F225pp
LC1 F225pp
LC1 F185pp
F225
110
220
220
250
LC1 F265pp
LC1 F265pp
LC1 F185pp
F265
160
280
280
315
LC1 F330pp
LC1 F330pp
LC1 F265pp
F330
185
315
355
375
LC1 F400pp
LC1 F400pp
LC1 F265pp
F400
Illustration For
item no.
use on
1
F185 to F400
No.
3
Sold in
lots of
1
Unit
reference
LAD N22
F185 to F400
CAD 32
0.580
F185 to F400
LAD T2
0.060
F185 to F400
LA9 D901
0.005
F185 to F400
GB2 CB10
0.050
F185
LA9 FG980
0.200
F225 to F400
LA9 FJ980
0.490
F185
LA9 F18517
0.800
F225
LA9 F22510
1.400
F265
LA9 FH610
1.400
LA9 FJ610
1.500
F185 to F400
Weight
kg
0.050
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35.
(2) Contactors supplied with coil. Complete the reference by adding the control circuit voltage code.
6WDQGDUGFRQWUROFLUFXLWYROWDJHVIRURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
LC1 D150
Volts
48
110
115
120
220
230
240
380
400
415
50/60 Hz
E7
F7
FE7
G7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
LC1 F185 and F225
Volts
50 Hz (coil LX1)
60 Hz (coil LX1)
8
48
E5
E6
110
F5
F6
115
FE5
120
G6
220
M5
M6
230
P5
240
U5
U6
380
Q5
Q6
400
V5
415
N5
230
P7
240
U7
380
Q7
400
V7
415
N7
10
Presentation :
page 1/44
Illustrations :
page 1/46
Dimensions :
page 1/50
Schemes :
page 1/51
1/47
14
12
10
17
1
15
3
*
9
*
*
KM1
KM3
KM2
6
*
*
7
16
13
* * *
17
11
10
See page 1/46
1/48
References (continued)
Neutral terminals
with stop and spare
volt free terminal
(for control circuit)
Illustration
item no.
9
10
For
use on
F185
No.
3
Sold in
lots of
10
Unit
reference
DZ3 GA3
F225F400
10
DZ3 HA3
0.007
F185
10
AB1 BC9535
0.236
100
AB1 AB8P35
0.006
10
DZ3 HA3
0.007
10
AB1 BC15035
0.277
100
AB1 AB8M35
0.007
10
DZ3 JA3
0.010
10
AB1 BC24035
0.287
100
AB1 AB8M35
0.007
10
DZ3 JA3
0.010
Weight
kg
0.006
Reducer bracket
11
F400
LA9 F100
0.100
12
F185F400
10
AM1 DE200
0.900
13
F185F400
AM1 EC200
2.980
Uprights (2)
14
F115F400
AM1 EC200
2.980
15
F185F400
10
AF1 CD061
0.020
100
AF1 VA618
0.006
16
10
AF1 CD081
0.020
10
AF1 VC820
0.024
17
10
AF1 CD061
0.020
100
AF1 VA618
0.006
10
AF1 CD061
0.020
10
AF1 CD081
0.020
100
AF1 VA618
0.006
10
AF1 VC820
0.024
F185F225
ACM GV763
19.090
F265
ACM GV973
33.310
ACM GV1084
54.000
AE3 FX122
F185F400
F185F330
15
F400
Enclosures:
metal, grey RAL 7032
Fixing lugs
adjustable for enclosure ACM
0.080
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35.
(2) Supplied in 2 m lengths. See page 1/50 for cutting to length.
10
Presentation :
page 1/44
Illustrations :
page 1/48
Dimensions :
page 1/50
Schemes :
page 1/51
1/49
Dimensions
Dimensions
G
F1 F2
KM2
KM3
KM1
K2
K3
K4
K1
4
c
a
565
b
675
c
235
G
525
H
625
K
160
K1
110
K2
80
K3
110
K4
80
565
675
235
525
625
160
110
80
110
80
665
775
266
625
725
165
110
100
110
110
765
975
276
725
825
195
140
100
110
180
765
975
276
725
925
195
140
100
180
110
10
Presentation:
page 1/44
1/50
References:
pages 1/47 and 1/49
Schemes
Star-delta starters
Schemes
Star-delta starters
W1
2
1
2
5
6
W2
U2
KM1
W1
W2
V1
V2
U1
U2
KM3
V1
L3
KM2
V2
L2
3
U1
L1
1
4
F1
95
21
96
F1
67
KM2
68
154
KM1
172
184
14
153
13 22
Remote
control
KM1
7
KA1
54
61
KM2
14
56
53
KM2
13
55
171
183
KM1
KM3
A1
A1
KM3
A2
KA1
A2
KM2
A2
KM1
A2
F2
A1
A1
62
10
Presentation:
page 1/44
References:
pages 1/45, 1/47 and 1/49
1/51
Presentation
107983
TeSys U starter-controllers
Presentation
The TeSys U starter-controller is a D.O.L. starter (1) which performs the following
functions:
b Protection and control of single-phase or 3-phase motors:
v isolation and breaking function,
v overload and short-circuit protection,
v thermal overload protection,
v power switching.
b Control of the application:
v protection function alarms, application monitoring (running time, number of faults,
motor current values, ...),
v logs (last 5 faults saved, together with motor parameter values).
These functions can be added by selecting control units and function modules which
simply clip into the power base.
This late customisation is even possible after power and control circuit wiring has
been completed.
3
TeSys U starter-controller
7H6\V8LVDH[LEOHUDQJHWKDWPHHWVWKHFXUUHQWDQGIXWXUHQHHGVRIV\VWHP
builders, panel builders and machine manufacturers, as well as those of additional
systems.
)URPGHVLJQWKURXJKWRRSHUDWLRQ7H6\V8RIIHUVPDQ\DGYDQWDJHVDQGVLPSOLHV
the selection of components in comparison with a traditional solution.
- WKHEUHDNLQJLVRODWLRQDQGFRQWDFWRUIXQFWLRQVDUHLQFRUSRUDWHGLQDVLQJOHEORFN
this means fewer references to be ordered and easy selection without any risk of
error, because a single reference covers all needs up to 15 Kw.
- the control unit has a wide setting range. It can operate on a d.c. or a.c. supply.
The number of references required is divided by 10, compared with traditional
solutions.
5
538849
The compact components in the TeSys U range are mounted on a single rail, so
optimising the amount of space required in enclosures. By eliminating power wiring
between the circuit-breaker and contactor, TeSys U reduces installation times in
enclosures.
Setting-up accessories simplify or completely eliminate wiring between components
and eliminate the risk of errors.
Starter-controller
Consists of a power base and a control unit.
Power bases 1
The power base is independent of the control voltage.
It is available from 0 to 15 kW at 400 V.
It incorporates the breaking function with a breaking capacity of 50 kA at 400V, total
coordination (continuity of service) and the switching function.
b 2 ratings are available: 012 A and 032 A.
b Non-reversing (LUB) and reversing (LU2B).
Control units 2
These must be selected according to the control voltage, the power of the motor to
be protected and the type of protection required.
b Standard control unit (LUCA)VDWLVHVWKHEDVLFSURWHFWLRQUHTXLUHPHQWVIRU
motor starters: overload and short-circuit.
b Magnetic control unit (LUCL)ZKHQWWHGXSVWUHDPRIDYDULDEOHVSHHGGULYHRU
soft start-soft stop unit and used in conjunction with an LUB 12 or LUB 32 power
base, this unit provides isolation and short-circuit protection of the motor starter.
b Advanced control unit (LUCB, LUCC or LUCD): allows additional advanced
functions such as alarm, fault differentiation,...
b Multifunction control unit (LUCM): suitable for the most sophisticated control
and protection requirements.
The control units are interchangeable without rewiring and without using tools.
They have a wide range of adjustment (range of 4) and low heat dissipation, due to
the fact that bimetallic overload protection components are no longer used.
10
(1) For use with resistive and inductive loads. Control of d.c. or capacitive loads is not possible.
1/52
Presentation (continued)
Control options
538852
All alarm and fault information processed by these modules is available on digital
contacts.
3
Communication modules 3
The information processed is exchanged:
b Via a parallel bus:
v parallel wiring module (LUF C00).
538850
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
Auxiliary contacts 4
They provide the following information: fault signalling and rotary knob in "ready"
position.
538851
Power options
Reverser block 5
Allows a non-reversing power base to be converted to reversing operation.
The reverser block (LU2M) is mounted directly beneath the power base without
modifying the width of the product (45 mm). The reverser block (LU6M) is mounted
separately from the power base when the height available is limited.
Limiter-disconnector LUA LB
This unit is mounted directly on the power base. It allows the breaking capacity to be
increased up to 130 kA at 400 V, with a visible break.
Setting-up accessories
Plug-in terminal blocks 6
The control terminal blocks are of the plug-in type, so allowing wiring to be prepared
away from the machine or the replacement of products without rewiring.
7
10
1/53
Presentation (continued)
3/L2
1/L1
A2
A1
6/T3
22/NC
21/NC
14/NO
Low consumption
technology coil
5/L3
1/L1
2/T1
Power switching
4/T2
Control unit
Overload protection
3/L2
13/NO
Short-ciircuit protection
3
6/T3
Reverser
4/T2
2/T1
Control unit
Pre-wiring
In
Understanding the commercial references through a comparison with a traditional motor starter
7
12 Amp
category AC3
Nonreversing
Contactor
family
Coil voltage :
110 V 50/60 Hz
TeSys D
Circuitbreaker
family
Startercontroller
family
1/54
TeSys D
Wide range
control unit
Standard
Power base
10
For ratings
up to 12 A
Rating
Size of product 2
(45 mm wide)
Startercontroller
family
Control voltage
e.g.. : 110240 V
AC/DC
Rating
e.g.. : 312 A
82
81
84
A2
B1
A1
A3
B3
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
Reverser
Presentation (continued)
Selection
CONTROL UNIT
POWER BASE
2
For D.O.L. starting
non-reversing
Setting range
Reference to be completed by
adding the voltage code
or
Reference
Rating
5
Auxiliary contacts
6
Auxiliary contacts
Number of contacts
Auxiliary contacts
References
Signalling contacts
Signalling contacts
Power base
Number of contacts
Fault signalling
Removable terminal
block
9
References
10
1/55
Presentation (continued)
1
LUCL
LUCA
Class 10 - 3-phase
(see page 1/69)
b Short-circuit protection
b Manual Reset
Motor thermal overload protection must
be provided by the variable speed
controller or soft starter.
4
1
2
3
Power base
LUB or LU2B
8
3
10
Note: the colour indicates possible combinations with the selected control unit.
Example: function module LUF DH11 can only be used with an advanced control unit.
1/56
LUCB
Class 10 - 3-phase
LUCC
Class 10 - single-phase
b
b
v
v
v
v
LUCD
LUCM
Class 20 - 3-phase
(see page 1/69)
5
2
AS-Interface
communication modules (1)
ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
(see page 1/78)
3UREXV'3
communication module (1)
LUL C07
(see page 1/80)
CANopen
communication module (1)
LUL C08
(see page 1/84)
DeviceNet
communication module (1)
LUL C09
(see page 1/86)
Advantys STB
communication module (1)
LUL C15
(see page 1/90)
7
Modbus
communication modules (1)
LUL C031 and LUL C033
(see page 1/92)
10
(1) Communication modules can only be combined with a c 24 V control unit (LUCp pp BL).
1/57
Application examples
525971
TeSys U starter-controllers
Application
Starting and protection of a pump.
Operating conditions
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
Power: 4 kW at 400 V.
In: 9 A.
Maximum of 10 class 10 starts per hour.
Duty class S3.
3-wire control:
Start button (S2),
Stop button (S1),
Control circuit voltage: a 230 V.
Products used
Description
Power base
12 A with screw clamp connections
Standard control unit
Item
1
Quantity Reference
1
LUB 12
LUCA 12FU
Page
1/62
1/69
Functions performed
510901
4
1
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
Scheme
230 V
13
14
C.U.
10
1/58
A1
6/T3
A2
4/T2
M
3
W1
V1
U1
2/T1
Application examples
510902
TeSys U starter-controllers
Application
Expansion of an existing installation for improved control of its operation.
Operating conditions
Monitor the status of the motor and obtain alarm signalling by a digital contact in
order to improve operation of the pump and anticipate a complete stoppage due to
thermal overload.
Item
Page
Replace the standard control unit with an advanced control unit and insert a thermal
overload alarm function module.
Advanced control unit
Alarm function module
2
3
1
1
LUCB 12FU
LUF W10
1/69
1/71
Functions performed
b Alarm information is generated by the advanced control unit and is processed by
the thermal overload alarm function module to make it usable.
b The advanced control unit includes a thermal trip Test button on its front panel.
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
Scheme
230 V
13
A1
LUF W10
07
Alarms Module
08
To
application
A2
4/T2
6/T3
W1
V1
2/T1
14
C.U.
U1
Quantity Reference
M
3
7
Other versions
10
1/59
Application examples
520971
TeSys U starter-controllers
Application
Manual control of a 2-position turntable.
Operating conditions
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
b
b
Products used
Description
Power base, reversing,
12 A with screw clamp connections
Standard control unit
523761
Item
1
Quantity Reference
1
LU2B 12FU
Page
1/63
LUCA 12FU
1/69
Functions performed
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V.
b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of
service) in case of a short-circuit.
b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4.
b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
b ,QWHUORFNEHWZHHQWKHPRWRUVWDUWHUFRQWURODQGWKHSRVLWLRQRIWKHURWDU\NQREQRW
possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position.
Electrical interlocking is ensured by pre-wired connector LU9M R1C included on
base LU2B 12. The design of the reversing power block makes mechanical
interlocking unnecessary.
V1
M
3
10
1/60
6/T3
W1
U1
2/T1
4/T2
C.U.
115 V
A2
A1
B3
A3
LU2B
B1
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
Application examples
520969
TeSys U starter-controllers
Application
Monitoring operation of a surface pump in a water treatment plant to avoid dry
running, which could lead to destruction of the pump.
Operating conditions
b
b
b
b
b
Power: 15 kW at 400 V.
In: 28.5 A.
Duty class S1.
Control circuit voltage: c 24 V.
Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.
Products used
510903
Description
Power base 32 A without connections
Multifunction control unit
Modbus communication module
Pre-wired coil connection
Connection of communication module
output terminals to the coil terminals
Connection cable for connecting the
communication module to the serial bus
T-junction
Item
1
2
3
4
Quantity
1
1
1
1
Reference
LUB 320
LUCM 32BL
LUL C033
LU9B N11C
Page
1/62
1/70
1/93
1/93
1/93
1/93
Functions performed
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V.
b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of
service) in case of a short-circuit.
b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4.
b Load switching (1.5 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
b Measurement of load current and detection of no-load running by the multifunction
control unit.
b ,QWHUORFNEHWZHHQWKHPRWRUVWDUWHUFRQWURODQGWKHSRVLWLRQRIWKHURWDU\NQREQRW
possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position.
b No-load running or operation under load. To use this function, the following
parameters must be entered:
v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function,
v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be
below the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 200 s),
v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting
FXUUHQW,IWKHUDWLRUHPDLQVEHORZWKLVWKUHVKROGIRUWKHWLPHVSHFLHGLQWKHSUHYLRXV
parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 30 to 100 %).
b Indication of the various motor starter statuses and currents.
3
4
LUL C033
24 V 24 V
c Aux COM
D (B)
D (A)
Gnd
LU9B N11C
Pre wired coil
Modbus Module
LO1
LI1
LI2
D (B)
D (A)
Gnd
5/L3
Multifunction
Control Unit
4 5 8
4 5 8
C.U.
8
+
W1 6/T3
V1 4/T2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
LUCM
24 V Aux
U1 2/T1
0RGEXVSUROH,(&
Commands (Register 704)
Forward running
Reverse running
Reserved
Reset
Reserved
Connection test
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved 3-phase control
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
3/L2
1/L1
Schemes
M
3
24 V
Modbus
VW3 A8 306 TF03
Other functions
The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions,
such as: monitoring and control of phase current, alarm,
0RGXOH/8/&DOVRSURYLGHVDSURJUDPPDEOHRXWSXWDQGWZRFRQJXUDEOH
discrete inputs.
1/61
10
References
TeSys U starter-controllers
7ZRYHUVLRQVRIFRQWUROFRQQHFWLRQFRQJXUDWLRQDUHDYDLODEOH
b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block,
b without connections. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and
is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of
control connection prewiring accessories) or when a reverser block is to be mounted
by the customer.
561330
520739
Item
(2)
Rating
y 440 V 500 V
A
A
Reference
Weight
690 V
A
kg
These bases have 2 auxiliary contacts: 1 N/O (13-14) and 1 N/C (21-22) which
indicate the closed or open position of the power poles.
LUB p2
A low power internal contact allows power supply to the control unit to be switched off
when the rotary knob is no longer in the ON position.
LUB p20
The power bases must be used in conjunction with a control unit, see pages 1/68 to 1/70
510904
Screw
clamp
terminals
Screw
clamp
terminals
1+2+3
+4
Without
1+2
connections
1
2
12
12
LUB 12
0.900
32
23
21
LUB 32
0.900
12
12
LUB 120
0.865
32
23
21
LUB 320
0.865
3
LUB p2
10
1/62
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111
Item
(2)
3+4
Reference
LU9B N11
Weight
kg
0.045
(1) Rated breaking capacity for operation on short-circuit (Ics), see table below.
For higher values, use current limiters, see page 1/66
Volts
230
440
500
690 (3)
kA
50
50
10
4
(2) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
in the illustration.
(3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0.
Other versions
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 to 1/98
For base
Schemes:
pages 1/112 to 1/119
References
TeSys U starter-controllers
561270
7ZRYHUVLRQVRIFRQWUROFRQQHFWLRQFRQJXUDWLRQDUHDYDLODEOH
b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block,
b without connections. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and
is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of
control connection prewiring accessories).
Item
(1)
Rating
y 440 V 500 V
A
A
690 V
A
Reference, to
be completed) (2)
Weight
kg
These bases have two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate nonreversing and reversing operating status.
Screw
clamp
terminals
Screw
clamp
terminals
Without
connections
1 + 2 + 3 12
+4+5
32
12
23
9
21
LU2B 12pp
LU2B 32pp
1.270
1.270
1 + 2 + 3 12
+5
32
12
23
9
21
LU2B A0pp
LU2B B0pp
1.270
1.250
510905
LU2B p2
32 A reverser block
Connection
Power
For mounting directly
Screw clamp
beneath the power base terminals
For mounting separately Screw clamp
from the base
terminals
VFUHZRUUDLO[LQJ
Item (1)
Control
3
Without
connections
6
Without
connections
Reference, to
be completed) (2)
Weight
kg
LU2M B0pp
0.400
LU6M B0pp
0.425
Accessories
Description Item
Control
terminal
block
3
7
Application
Reference
Weight
kg
0.025
0.025
0.025
0.030
Weight
kg
5
LU9M R1C
0.035
Pre-wired connector (3)
(1) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
in the illustration.
(2) Select the same control voltage as that of the control unit.
Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts
24
4872
110240
c
BL
a
B
c or a
ES (4)
FU (5)
(3) For control connection between a power base and a reverser block, for direct mounting.
(4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V.
510906
LU2B p2
Other versions
7
Item
Reference
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 to 1/98
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111
Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119
1/63
Presentation
N/C pole
contact
N/O
contact
any fault
N/C ontact
any fault
LUF N11
31-32
LUA1 C20
97-98
LUA1 C11
95-96
or
LUF N02
31-32
41-42
LUA1 C200
No terminal
block
or
LUF N20
33-34
43-44
LUB9 N11
21-22
LUA1 C11
17-18
or
LUF N11
43-44
LUA1 C110
No terminal
block
or
LUB9 N11
13-14
1
References of add-on contact blocks
and auxiliary contact modules
Terminal referencing
Off
OFF
Ready to operate
Start
Tripped on short-circuit
Tripped on
thermal overload
TRIP
10
1/64
I>>
Characteristics:
page 1/98
TRIP
Schemes:
page 1/112
N/O contact
in closed position.
N/C contact
in open position.
N/O contact
product
ready
LUA1 C20
17-18
References
568764
References
Auxiliary contacts
Signalling and composition
4
6
1
2
5
Cabling
Item
Reference
Weight
kg
0.030
Screw clamp
terminals
1+2
LUA1 C11
Without
connections
LUA1 C110
0.012
Screw clamp
terminals
1+2
LUA1 C20
0.030
Without
connections
LUA1 C200
0.012
2 N/O contacts
Contacts open, rotary knob
in OFF position
Contacts closed, rotary knob
in ready position
Screw clamp
terminals
LUA8 E20
0.048
Item
Reference
LUF N20
Weight
kg
0.050
LUF N11
0.050
LUF N02
0.050
Item
Reference
Screw clamp
LUA1 C110
terminal blocks
LU9B C11
Weight
kg
0.022
LUA1 C200
LU9B C20
0.022
LU9C 1
0.020
LU9C 2
0.010
Accessories
Description
Blanking
covers
For use on
10
Characteristics:
page 1/98
Schemes:
page 1/112
1/65
References
Description
4 1
Application
Pitch
mm
45
54
Item
2
Sold in
lots of
1
1
Unit
reference
GV2 G245
GV2 G254
Weight
kg
0.036
0.038
3 tap-offs
45
54
1
1
GV2 G345
GV2 G354
0.058
0.060
4 tap-offs
45
54
1
1
GV2 G445
GV2 G454
0.77
0.085
5 tap-offs
54
GV2 G554
0.100
GV1 G10
0.005
GV1 G09
0.040
2
Sets of 3-pole
63 A busbars
2 tap-offs
Protective
end cover
For unused
busbar outlets
Item
Length
For mounting in
enclosure width
mm
452
mm
800
Reference
AK5 JB144
Weight
kg
0.900
5
Removable 3-phase power sockets
Number of
points used
on the busbar
system
2
Thermal
current
Item
Cable
lengths
Sold in Unit
lots of reference
16
200
kg
0.040
32
250
0.045
1000
0.060
Weight
Limiterdisconnector
(3) (5)
Current limiter
(3)
Limiter cartridge
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
10
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111
1/66
Breaking
Mounting
capacity Iq
y 440 V 690 V
kA
kA
130
70
Direct on
power base
Unit
reference
kg
0.310
100
35
Separate
LA9 LB920
0.320
130
70
7+9
Weight
0.135
LAD 90 (4)
On power base,
0.001
on reverser block,
on parallel link
splitter box
The rated peak current for power sockets AK5 PCpp is 6 kA.
When used in association with power bases LUBpp, the prospective short-circuit current
must not exceed 7 kA.
Supplied with limiter cartridge.
These devices make it possible to increase the breaking capacity of the power base.
Sold in lots of 100.
The limiter must be mounted on an LUB or LU2B power base. The limiter can therefore not
be common to several motor starters.
Clip-in
marker holder
(1)
Item
References (continued)
568768
Phase barrier
Description
568769
Phase barrier
Item
Application
Mounting Reference
1
Weight
kg
0.030
LU9 AP00
Weight
kg
0.490
LU9 AP11
0.150
LU9 AP12
0.150
Reference
2+3
568771
Item
5
Handle for mounting in the MCC drawer
(Motor Control Centre)
LU9 AP20
0.096
7KH[LQJNLWLQFOXGHVDEUDFNHWDQGDVKDIWH[WHQVLRQPD[LPXPGHSWKPP
7RXVHWKH[LQJNLWZLWKD'2/UHYHUVLQJSRZHUEDVHRQO\UHYHUVHUEORFN/80PXVWEH
used.
568770
RESET
TEST
10
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111
1/67
Selection
Operating characteristics
Control units
Standard
LUCA
LUCD
Short-circuit protection
Protection against phase loss
Advanced
LUCB
LUCC
Multifunction
LUCM
3 to 17 x the setting current
10
3-phase
10
20
Single-phase 3-phase
530
Single-phase and 3-phase
Manual
Automatic or remote
4
Alarm
5
Log function
Monitoring function
With communication module or via Modbus port on control unit LUCM (2)
Starter status (ready, running, fault)
Reset method
Alarm
Remote reset via the bus
Indication of motor load
10
1/68
References
510913
Description
1
5
2
1
2
3
4
5
Setting
range
Clip-in
mounting on
power base
Rating
0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
312
4.518
832
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
32
32
Reference, to
be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)
Weight
2
kg
0.09
0.25
1.5
5.5
7.5
15
520735
LUCA pppp
LUCB pppp
2.2
5.5
9
15
3
9
15
18.5
LUCA X6pp
LUCA 1Xpp
LUCA 05pp
LUCA 12pp
LUCA 18pp
LUCA 32pp
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
2.2
5.5
9
15
3
9
15
18.5
0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
312
4.518
832
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
32
32
LUCB X6pp
LUCB 1Xpp
LUCB 05pp
LUCB 12pp
LUCB 18pp
LUCB 32pp
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
312
4.518
832
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
32
32
LUCC X6pp
LUCC 1Xpp
LUCC 05pp
LUCC 12pp
LUCC 18pp
LUCC 32pp
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
312
4.518
832
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
32
32
LUCD X6pp
LUCD 1Xpp
LUCD 05pp
LUCD 12pp
LUCD 18pp
LUCD 32pp
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.09
0.55
2.2
4
7.5
520736
2.2
5.5
9
15
3
9
15
18.5
a
B
c or a
ES (4)
FU (5)
(2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module.
(3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %.
(4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V.
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 and 1/99
Schemes:
page 1/113
1/69
References
510914
Description
6
1
2
3
LUCMppBL
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
520737
Parameter entry, monitoring of parameter values and consultation of logs are carried
out:
b either on the front panel, using the built-in display window/keypad,
b or via an operator terminal,
b or via a PC or a PDA with PowerSuite software,
b or remotely, via a Modbus communication bus.
Programming of the product via the keypad requires a c 24 V auxiliary power
supply.
0.09
0.25
3
1.5
2.2
Setting
range
Clip-in
mounting on
power base
Rating
A
0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
A
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
LUCM X6BL
LUCM 1XBL
LUCM 05BL
kg
0.175
0.175
0.175
5.5
7.5
15
312
4.518
832
12 and 32
32
32
LUCM 12BL
LUCM 18BL
LUCM 32BL
0.175
0.175
0.175
5.5
9
15
9
15
18.5
On CD-Rom
Language
Reference
Multi-language (3)
LU9 CD1
Weight
kg
0.022
HMI terminal
521335
This compact Magelis terminal enables the parameters of multifunction control unit
/8&0WREHUHDGDQGPRGLHG
,WLVVXSSOLHGSUHFRQJXUHGWRSURYLGHGLDORJXHZLWK7H6\V8VWDUWHUFRQWUROOHUV
(Modbus protocol, application pages and alarm pages loaded).
Starter-controller alarm and fault management takes priority.
Language
Weight
Reference
(1)
Multi-language (3)
XBT NU400
Display window
Supply voltage
Reference
4 lines of
20 characters
c 24 V
XBT NU400
Length
Type
Reference
2.5 m
SUB-D 25-way
female - RJ45
XBT Z938
Weight
kg
0.150
Weight
kg
0.200
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 and 1/99
1/70
Schemes:
pages 1/112 to 1/115
References
Function modules
Output
Item
Application
Reference
Weight
kg
510915
1 N/O + 1 N/C
a or c 24250 V
LUF DH11
0.060
These modules can only be used with an advanced control unit and require an a/c
24240 V external power supply.
510445
Note: Terminals X1-X2 are not isolated from the signalling module power supply.
)RUUHPRWHUHVHWWLQJXVHDYROWIUHHFRQWDFWVSHFLFWRHDFKPRGXOHWREHUHVHW
1 N/C
1 N/O
4
4
a or c 24250 V
a or c 24250 V
LUF DA01
LUF DA10
0.055
0.055
%
200
100
1
2
3
1 N/O
1 2.2 kW
2 4 kW
3 7.5 kW
12 mA
20 mA
a or c 24250 V
LUF W10
0.055
LUF V2
0.050
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 and 1/101
Schemes:
page 1/114
1/71
Presentation,
functions
Presentation
534513
The PowerSuite software workshop for PC is a user-friendly tool designed for setting
up the Schneider Electric control device motors:
b TeSys U starter-controllers
b TeSys T motor management systems
b Altistart soft start/soft stop units
b Altivar variable speed drives
b Lexium 05 servo drives
PowerSuite screen on PC
533181
Start-up
When the PC is connected to the device, the PowerSuite software workshop can be
used to:
b 7UDQVIHUWKHJHQHUDWHGFRQJXUDWLRQ
b Adjust
b Monitor. This option has been enhanced with new functions such as:
v The oscilloscope
v The high-speed oscilloscope (minimum time base: 2 ms)
v The FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) oscilloscope
v Display of communication parameters
b Control
b 6DYHWKHQDOFRQJXUDWLRQ
6
PowerSuite screen on PC
View of PI regulator function parameters
Maintenance
To facilitate maintenance operations, the PowerSuite software workshop can be
used to:
b &RPSDUHWKHFRQJXUDWLRQRIDGHYLFHFXUUHQWO\EHLQJXVHGZLWKDVDYHG
FRQJXUDWLRQ
b Manage the users installed equipment base, in particular:
v Organize the installed base into folders (electrical equipment, machinery,
workshops, etc.)
v Store maintenance messages
v Facilitate Modbus TCP connection by storing the IP address
User interface
The PowerSuite software workshop can be used to:
b Present the device parameters (arranged by function) in the form of illustrated
views of diagrams or simple tables
b Customize the parameter names
b Create:
v A user menu (choice of particular parameters)
v Monitoring control panels with graphic elements (cursors, gauges, bar charts)
b Perform sort operations on the parameters
b 'LVSOD\WH[WLQYHODQJXDJHV(QJOLVK)UHQFK*HUPDQ,WDOLDQDQG6SDQLVK7KH
language changes immediately and there is no need to restart the program.
572706
Functions (1)
3UHSDULQJFRQJXUDWLRQV
The PowerSuite software workshop can be used on its own to generate the device
FRQJXUDWLRQZKLFKFDQEHVDYHGSULQWHGDQGH[SRUWHGWRRIFHDXWRPDWLRQ
software.
10
View of the FTT oscilloscope
References:
page 1/74
1/72
(1) Certain functions are not available for all devices. See the table of available functions,
page 1/73.
Functions (continued)
Controller
Startercontroller
Soft start/
soft stop
unit
Drives
TeSys T
TeSys U
ATS 48
ATV 11 ATV 31
Servo
drive
ATV 61
ATV 71
LXM 05
Monitoring
Oscilloscope
High-speed oscilloscope
FFT oscilloscope
Display of communication parameters
Control
Customization of parameter names
Creation of a user menu
Creation of monitoring control panels
536845
Connections (1)
Modbus serial link
The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the device terminal
port or Modbus network port via the serial port on the PC.
PowerSuite
RS 232
XGS Z24
RS 485
ATV 31 or
Lexium 05
ATV 61
ATV 71
TeSys U
ATS 48
536846
PowerSuite
PLC (2)
If the PC does not feature Bluetooth technology, use the VW3 A8 115 USB Bluetooth adapter.
Bridge
Remote maintenance
A simple Modbus TCP connection is all that is required for the PowerSuite software
workshop to support remote monitoring and diagnostics.
When devices are not connected to the Modbus TCP network, or it is not directly
accessible, various remote transmission solutions may be used instead (modem,
WHOHSURFHVVLQJJDWHZD\HWF3OHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
Modbus
serial link
ATV 31 or
Lexium 05
ATS 48
ATV 61
ATV 71
10
Presentation:
page 1/72
References:
page 1/74
1/73
References
2
VW3 A8 104
536847
Reference
Weight
kg
0.100
PowerSuite CD-ROM
VW3 A8 104
b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian
and Spanish
b Variable speed drive, starter and servo drive technical manuals
PowerSuite update
CD-ROM (1)
VW3 A8 105
0.100
VW3 A8 106
b 1 x 3 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector on starter-controller or
drive side and 1 RS 232/RS 485 converter with 1 9-way female
SUB-D connector on PC side
b For the ATV 11 drive: 1 converter with one 4-way male SUB-D
connector and 1 RJ45 connector
b For ATV 38/58/58F drives: 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter
0.350
XGS Z24
b 1 Modbus multidrop converter for connection to screw
terminals. Requires a 24 V c (20...30 V), 20 mA power supply (2)
0.105
Modbus-Bluetooth adapter
(3)
VW3 A8 114
b 1 Bluetooth adapter (10 m range, class 2)
with 1 RJ45 connector
b For PowerSuite: 1 x 0.1 m cable with 2 RJ45 connectors
b For TwidoSoft: 1 x 0.1 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector and
1 mini DIN connector
b For ATV 38/58/58F drives: 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter
0.155
VW3 A8 115
0.290
4
VW3 A8 114
Composition
(1) Updates a version u V1.40 with the latest available version. For versions < V1.40, you should order the PowerSuite CD-Rom,
VW3 A8 104.
(2) Please refer to the "Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies" catalogue.
(3) Can also be used to communicate between a Twido PLC and the TwidoSoft software workshop.
10
Presentation:
page 1/72
1/74
Functions:
page 1/72
Compatibility
Modbus
Controller
Startercontroller
Soft start/
soft stop
unit
TeSys T
TeSys U (2)
ATS 48
ATV 11
ATV 31
ATV 61
ATV 71
V2.5
V1.40
V1.30
V1.40
V2.0
V2.3
V2.2
V2.2
V2.4
V2.5
V2.3
V2.2
Drives
Servo drives
V1.50
V2.0
V2.3
V2.2
V2.2
V2.4
V2.5
Bluetooth
V2.2
V2.2
V2.3
V2.2
V2.2
V2.4
V2.5
10
Presentation:
page 1/72
Functions:
page 1/72
References:
page 1/74
1/75
Presentation,
references
TeSys U starter-controllers
Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection
components
510916
Presentation
When used in conjunction with the Advantys STB distributed I/O solution, the
TeSys U starter-controller is ideal in decentralised automation architectures (2).
The use of dedicated parallel interface module STB EPI 2145 allows remote
connection of 4 starter-controllers.
511529
511528
1
2
The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect starter-controllers to the PLC
I/O modules quickly and without any need for tools. It replaces traditional screw
terminal and single wire connections. It is used with the Telefast pre-wired system
(1).
The parallel wiring module provides the status and command information for each
starter-controller. It must be used with an LUB 12 or LU2B A0BL power base and a
c 24 V control unit LUCp ppBL.
Splitter boxes LU9 G02 and LU9 G03 distribute information from the PLC I/O
modules to each of the starter-controllers connected to it.
Splitter box LU9 G02 (maximum of 4 reversing starters) is optimised for use with
card TSX DMZ28DTK and splitter box LU9 G03 (maximum of 8 reversing starters)
for use with cards TSX DMZ64DTK and BMX DDM3202K.
LU9 G03
510917
Architecture
10
9
To
PLC
11
12
12
References
Description
Parallel wiring module
Item
Reference
LUF C00
(1) Please consult our "Power Control and connection components catalogue.
(2) Please consult our "IP20 distributed inputs/outputs Advantys STB" catalogue
10
1/76
Weight
kg
0.045
References (continued)
TeSys U starter-controllers
Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection
components
566964
4
LUB + LUF C00 + LU9B
Item
Reference
LU9B N11C
LU2B pp
13
LU9M RC
Weight
kg
0.045
0.030
b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
may by used.
No tools are required to connect the parallel wiring module to the PLC. Connection
LVYLDDVSOLWWHUER[ZKLFKDOORZVXSWRVWDUWHUFRQWUROOHUVWREHFRQQHFWHGD
maximum of 4 reversing starters per splitter box is allowed.
The splitter box requires a c 24 V power supply.
Splitter boxes
Connectors
PLC side
Starter-controller
side
8 x RJ45
2 x HE 10
20-way
Reference
Weight
4 reversing starters
maximum
0.260
8 reversing starters
maximum
0.260
kg
Item
2 x RJ45 connectors
13
Length
m
0.3
1
3
LU9 R03
LU9 R10
LU9 R30
Weight
kg
0.045
0.065
0.125
Weight
Reference
C.s.a.
Length
Reference
mm2
0.324
m
0.5
1
2
3
5
kg
0.085
0.150
0.280
0.410
0.670
28
0.080
1
2
3
0.080
0.140
0.210
0.324
0.5
0.210
0.350
0.630
0.940
1.530
10
3.000
3
5
0.400
0.660
HE 10
40-way
Bare wires
2 x HE 10
20-way
HE 10
20-way
22
0.324
(1) Allows "run" and "fault" status of each starter-controller to be fed back to the PLC and
transmits commands.
1/77
10
Presentation,
references
TeSys U starter-controllers
AS-Interface communication modules
Presentation
1
510919
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
24 V
AS-Interface
8
Data bits
(status)
Bit value
Command D0 (O)
Command D1 (O)
Command D2 (O)
Command D3 (O)
')SUROHDQG$(SUROH
=0
=1
Stop forward
Forward running
Stop reverse
Reverse running
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Bit value
Status D0 (I)
Status D1 (I)
Status D2 (I)
Status D3 (I)
=0
Not ready or fault
Stopped
Not used
Not used
=1
Ready
Running
Not used
Not used
References
Description
Communication
modules
10
1/78
Addressing
Single
31 slaves
Extended
62 slaves
Item
Reference
ASI LUF C5
Weight
kg
0.065
0.065
References (continued)
TeSys U starter-controllers
AS-Interface communication modules
510920
Description
Pre-wired
coil connection
Item
Reference
LU9B N11C
LU2B pp
LU9M RC
Weight
kg
0.045
0.030
b Wire link
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
may be used.
531122
Description
Tap-off
Length
m
2
Reference
XZ CG0142
Weight
kg
0.265
520898
520899
Reference
Addressing terminal
Battery operated. Battery charger supplied
AS-Interface V.1 and V.2.1 compatible
Adjustment and diagnostics console
Runs on LR6 batteries
Allows addressing of AS-Interface V.2.1 slaves
and diagnostics
Cable adapter
For console XZ MC11
XZ MC11
Weight
kg
0.550
ASI TERV2
0.500
XZ MG12
0.070
Software set-up
$6,QWHUIDFHFRQJXUDWLRQLVFDUULHGRXWXVLQJ3/0LFUR-XQLRU3URVRIWZDUH)URP
WKHPRGXOHGHFODUDWLRQVFUHHQLWLVSRVVLEOHWRFRQJXUHDOOWKHVODYHGHYLFHV
corresponding to all the AS-Interface I/O.
&RQJXUDWLRQLVFDUULHGRXWE\IROORZLQJWKHLQVWUXFWLRQVRQWKHVFUHHQ
XZ MC11
ASI TERV2
Language
Reference
Weight
kg
0.022
1/79
10
Presentation
TeSys U starter-controllers
3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHDQGSUHZLUHGFRLO
connection components
567139
Presentation
When used in conjunction with the power base and control unit, communication
PRGXOH/8/&DOORZV7H6\V8VWDUWHUFRQWUROOHUVWREHFRQWUROOHGYLD3UREXV'3
(Deported Periphery).
Communication module LULC07 is of the slave type and uses the TeSys U systems
LQWHUQDOUHJLVWHUVZKLFKFDQEHDFFHVVHGYLDWKH3UREXV'3EXVLQF\FOLFRUDF\FOLF
PRGH7KLVPRGXOHKDVD9$GLVFUHWHRXWSXWDQGWZRFRQJXUDEOHGLVFUHWH
inputs.
10
Connections
Serial bus topology
11
8 7 6
15
1 LED indicating module status
2 Fault signalling LED
3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1,
OA3 and LO1
4 SUB-D connector for bus link
5 c 24 V supply connection
6 Discrete input
7 Discrete input
8 Discrete output
9 Outputs for starter-controller commands (nonreversing and reversing)
10 Pin for connection to control unit (advanced or
multifunction)
13
15
13
14
16
18
17
12
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
12
18
18
18
17
24 V
24 V
3URJUDPPDEOHFRQWUROOHUZLWK3UREXV'3PDVWHUFDUG
Other slave (not powered via the bus)
3UREXV'3ZLUHFDEOH76;3%6&$ P76;3%6&$ P
6WDQGDUG3UREXV'3FRQQHFWRU1$'RU1$'
3UREXV'3SRZHUVXSSO\PRGXOHIRUc 24 V-Aux supply to LUL C07 modules (LU9 GC7)
3UREXV'3FRQQHFWRU7H6\V8GHGLFDWHG/8$'
3UREXV'3ZLUHFDEOH/853%ppp)
3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH/8/&
3UREXV'3JHQHUDOLQIRUPDWLRQ
7KH7H6\V8FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHVXSSRUWV3UREXVDSSOLFDWLRQSUROHVEDVHG
on DP V0 and DP V1 services: motor starter (MS), motor management starter
(MMS).
Cyclic / Acyclic services
In general, data is exchanged via cyclic services and via acyclic services.
7KHDSSOLFDWLRQSUROHVGHQHIRUWKHF\FOLFGDWD
b manufacturer independent data,
b PDQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLFGDWD
PKW feature
In order to make data which is not cyclically exchanged accessible for DP V0
masters, a function called PKW (Periodically Kept in acyclic Words) is implemented.
The cyclic data carries a dedicated zone of 4 input words and 4 output words, called
3.:ZKLFKPDNHVLWSRVVLEOHWRDFFHVVDOOWKHUHJLVWHUVHQEORF
10
(1) Replace the asterisk with the letter corresponding to the required language.
1/80
Presentation (continued)
references
TeSys U starter-controllers
3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHDQGSUHZLUHGFRLO
connection components
106949
&RPSDWLELOLW\RI3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH/8/&
with c 24 V control units
LUL C07 in conjunction with:
LUCB/C/D ppBL LUCM ppBL
LUCA ppBL
Standard
Advanced
Multifunction
control unit
control unit
control unit
Information accessible
YLD3UREXV'3
LUL C07
References
Description
3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH
Item
Reference
18
LUL C07
Weight
kg
0.108
c 24 V
Item
Reference
LU9B N11L
LU2B pp
LU9M RL
Weight
kg
0.050
0.450
b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block.
When this reverser block and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired
coil connection LU9M RL may be used.
COM
LI2
c 24 V
LI1
LO1
Length
m
Item
(1)
Reference
15
LU9 GC7
Weight
kg
16
LU9 AD7
3UREXV'3FDEOHV
2-wire
100
TSX PBSCA100
TSX PBSCA400
3UREXV'3FDEOHV
4-wire
10
13
13
17
17
17
LU9 RPB010
LU9 RPB100
LU9 RPB400
3UREXV'3
power supply module
3UREXV'3FRQQHFWRU
c 24 V
A1
A2
L1
On
power
base
0V
400
100
400
1/81
10
Compatibility
&RPSDWLELOLW\RI3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH/8/&
with starter-controller LUB 12 / LUB 32
Maximum 1
or
or
2
3UREXV
DP
module
Pre-wired
coil
connection,
nonreversing
LUC M6XBL
LUL C07
LU9 BN11L
LUC M1XBL
LUL C07
LU9 BN11L
LUC A05BL
LUC M05BL
LUL C07
LU9 BN11L
LUB 12
or LUB 32
LUC A12BL
LUC M12BL
LUL C07
LU9 BN11L
7.5
LUB 32
LUC A18BL
LUC M18BL
LUL C07
LU9 BN11L
15
LUB 32
LUC A32BL
LUC M32BL
LUL C07
LU9 BN11L
567122
power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V
Power
base
Standard
control
unit
Advanced
control
unit
Nonreversing
Class 10
Class 10
LUB 12
or LUB 32
LUC A6XBL
0.25
LUB 12
or LUB 32
LUC A1XBL
1.5
LUB 12
or LUB 32
5.5
kW
0.09
3
4
LUB + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C07 + LU9B N11L
Multifunction
control
unit
Class 20
Classes
530
Note: 3UREXV'3PRGXOH/8/&LVQRWFRPSDWLEOHZLWK/870FRQWUROOHUV
10
1/82
Compatibility (continued)
TeSys U starter-controllers
3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHDQGSUHZLUHGFRLO
connection components
&RPSDWLELOLW\RI3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH/8/&
with starter-controller LU2B 12 / LU2B 32
Maximum 5
or
or
2
567123
3UREXV
DP
module
Pre-wired
coil
connection,
reversing
LUC M6XBL
LUL C07
LU9 MRL
LUC M1XBL
LUL C07
LU9 MRL
LUC A05BL
LUC M05BL
LUL C07
LU9 MRL
LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
LUC A12BL
LUC M12BL
LUL C07
LU9 MRL
7.5
LU2B 32BL
LUC A18BL
LUC M18BL
LUL C07
LU9 MRL
15
LU2B 32BL
LUC A32BL
LUC M32BL
LUL C07
LU9 MRL
power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V
Power
base
Standard
control
unit
Advanced
control
unit
Reversing
Class 10
Class 10
LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
LUC A6XBL
0.25
or LU2B 12BL
LU2B 32BL
LUC A1XBL
1.5
LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
5.5
kW
0.09
6
LU2B + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C07 + LU9M RL
Multifunction
control
unit
Class 20
Classes
530
Note: 3UREXV'3PRGXOH/8/&LVQRWFRPSDWLEOHZLWK/870FRQWUROOHUV
10
1/83
Presentation
TeSys U starter-controllers
CANopen communication module and
pre-wired coil connection components
Presentation
Communication module LUL C08 allows direct connection of TeSys U startercontrollers and controllers on a CANopen bus.
Module LUL C08 is of the slave type.
When used in conjunction with an LUC pppBL or LUC pT1BL control unit, module
LUL C08 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller.
)RUORFDOFRQWUROUHTXLUHPHQWVWKHPRGXOHLVHTXLSSHGZLWKDFRQJXUDEOHc 24 V.
9GLVFUHWHRXWSXWDQGWZRFRQJXUDEOHGLVFUHWHLQSXWV
LUL C08 communication modules can be connected to Advantys STB module :
XBE 2100K.
8 7 6
Connections
Star topology
Bus topology
10
12
12
and LO1
4
5
6
7
8
9
Discrete output
11
13
11
Discrete input
Discrete input
16
16
c 24 V supply connection
17
c 24 V
15
or
14
16
11
junction box).
14
17
16
19
17
c 24 V
17
15
18
WWHGZLWK76;&$1.&')7FRQQHFWRUVIRUWKHVODYHV
and with TSX CANKCDF90T connectors for the junction
boxes.
16 Starter-controller
17 CANopen communication module LUL C08
A c 24 V supply must be connected to module LUL C08 for outputs OA1, OA3 and
LO1.
Information carried by the bus
Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit
Standard
Starter status (ready, running, fault)
Start and Stop commands
Thermal overload alarm
Remote reset via the bus
Indication of motor load
Fault signalling and differentiation
Remote programming and monitoring of all
functions
"Log" function
"Monitoring" function
Alarms (overcurrent, ...)
Functions performed
For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual.
Advanced
Multifunction
10
1/84
References
TeSys U starter-controllers
CANopen communication module and
pre-wired coil connection components
Communication services
Communication module LUL C08 uses PDO, SDO and PKW type objects for data
exchange (Process Data Objects, Service Data Objects, Periodically Kept in Acyclic
Words).
3UHFRQJXUHGDQGHQDEOHG
7REHGHQHGE\FRQJXUDWLRQ
510922
References
Description
CANopen communication module
Item
Reference
16
LUL C08
Weight
kg
0.108
Note: The Electronic Data Sheets (EDS), and users manuals are available on the website
www.schneider-electric.com.
17
Description
Pre-wired coil connection
566988
Reference
17
18
LU9B N11L
LU9M RL
Weight
kg
0.050
0.450
b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL
may be used.
Length
m
Item
Reference
Weight
kg
0.3
14
14
14
14
11
11
TSX CANCADD03
0.045
TSX CANCADD1
0.065
TSX CANCADD3
0.125
TSX CANCADD5
1.500
14
14
14
14
11
11
TSX CANCBDD03
0.045
TSX CANCBDD1
0.065
TSX CANCBDD3
0.125
TSX CANCBDD5
1.500
Standard
16
1.0
3
5
Reel of cable
18
LU2B + LUL C08 + LU9M RL
50
100
TSX CANCA50
TSX CANCA100
UL approved
Cables equipped with
SUB-D connectors
0.3
1
3
5
Reel of cable
50
100
TSX CANCB50
TSX CANCB100
Separate components
Description
Elbowed connector
Straight connector
Junction box
Reference
Weight
kg
TSX CANKCDF90T
TSX CANKCDF180T
TSX CANTD M4
1/85
10
Presentation
567225
Presentation
When used in conjunction with the power base and control unit, communication
module LUL C09 allows TeSys U starter-controllers and controllers to be controlled
via DeviceNet.
Communication module LUL C09 is of the slave type and uses the TeSys U systems
internal registers which can be accessed via DeviceNet.
0RGXOH/8/&KDVDFRQJXUDEOH9$GLVFUHWHRXWSXWDQGWZR
FRQJXUDEOHGLVFUHWHLQSXWV
10
Connections
Serial bus topology
8 7 6
11
10
1/86
63 starter-controllers max.
with modules LUL C09
24 V
12
11
12
13
14
13
13
13
14
14
14
Presentation (continued),
references
TeSys U starter-controllers
DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil
connection components
567228
Information accessible
via DeviceNet
567226
LUL C09
References
Description
V
Can_L
Can_H
Item
Reference
14
LUL C09
V+
Weight
kg
0.108
24 V
24 V
+
+
LI2
LI1
LO1
24 V
Reference
LU2B pppp
LU9M RL
LU9B N11L
Weight
kg
0.050
0.450
b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block.
When this reverser block and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired
coil connection LU9M RL may be used.
Supply
Connection of power supplies
The 24 V supply to DeviceNet LUL C09 modules is provided via the (V+ , V-)
terminals.
The 24 V supply for the inputs/outputs must be provided separately from the supply
to the LUL C09 modules.
The 24 V Aux terminal is for supply to the LUCM control unit or the LUTM controller.
10
1/87
Compatibility
DeviceNet
module
Pre-wired
coil
connection,
nonreversing
LUC M6XBL
LUL C09
LU9 BN11L
LUC M1XBL
LUL C09
LU9 BN11L
LUC A05BL
LUC M05BL
LUL C09
LU9 BN11L
LUB 12
or LUB 32
LUC A12BL
LUC M12BL
LUL C09
LU9 BN11L
7.5
LUB 32
LUC A18BL
LUC M18BL
LUL C09
LU9 BN11L
15
LUB 32
LUC A32BL
LUC M32BL
LUL C09
LU9 BN11L
567122
power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V
Power
base
Standard
control unit
Advanced
control unit
Nonreversing
Class 10
Class 10
LUB 12
or LUB 32
LUC A6XBL
0.25
LUB 12
or LUB 32
LUC A1XBL
1.5
LUB 12
or LUB 32
5.5
kW
0.09
3
4
LUB + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C09 + LU9B N11L
Multifunction
control unit
Class 20
Classes
530
Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUT M controllers.
10
1/88
Compatibility (continued)
TeSys U starter-controllers
DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil
connection components
567123
DeviceNet
module
Pre-wired
coil
connection,
reversing
LUC M6XBL
LUL C09
LU9 MRL
LUC M1XBL
LUL C09
LU9 MRL
LUC A05BL
LUC M05BL
LUL C09
LU9 MRL
LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
LUC A12BL
LUC M12BL
LUL C09
LU9 MRL
7.5
LU2B 32BL
LUC A18BL
LUC M18BL
LUL C09
LU9 MRL
15
LU2B 32BL
LUC A32BL
LUC M32BL
LUL C09
LU9 MRL
power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V
Power
base
Standard
control unit
Advanced
control unit
Reversing
Class 10
Class 10
LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
LUC A6XBL
0.25
or LU2B 12BL
LU2B 32BL
LUC A1XBL
1.5
LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
5.5
kW
0.09
6
LU2B + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C09 + LU9M RL
Multifunction
control unit
Class 20
Classes
530
Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUT M controllers.
10
1/89
Presentation
TeSys U starter-controllers
Advantys STB communication module and
pre-wired coil connection components
Presentation
9
4
Communication module LUL C15 allows direct connection of TeSys U startercontrollers and controllers on an Advantys STB island, between two segments or at
the end of a segment. In the latter case, the segment must be equipped with an EOS
(End of segment) extension module STB XBE1100.
The starter-controller will then be able to make use of the services provided by
Advantys STB: self-addressing, autobaud, fallback positions.
When used in conjunction with an LUC pppBL or LUC pT1BL control unit, module
LUL C15 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller.
)RUORFDOFRQWUROUHTXLUHPHQWVWKHPRGXOHLVHTXLSSHGZLWKDFRQJXUDEOHc 24 V,
$GLVFUHWHRXWSXWDQGWZRFRQJXUDEOHGLVFUHWHLQSXWV
Connections
10
8 7 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
14
13
15
12
16
13
13
14
14 + 16
17
13
13
12
18
14
12
14
17
12
13 Starter-controller.
14 Communication module LUL C15.
15 Connector for connection of product either by wire link or using coil connection modules
Advanced
Multifunction
10
LUCA ppBL / B ppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All versions marketed after 2T04081 (1)
All versions u V3.2
LUCM ppBL
All versions u V3.2
LUCM T1BL
(1) This date code is made up as follows: 2T or 2C: factory code. 04,05,06 and so on: year of
manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.
1/90
References
TeSys U starter-controllers
Advantys STB communication module and
pre-wired coil connection components
Possible architectures
The maximum number of starter-controllers and controllers that can be connected to
an Advantys STB island depends on the Network Interface Module (NIM) used and
the associated control units.
NIM
(Network Interface
Module)
CANopen
Standard
Basic
DeviceNet
Standard
Basic
3UREXV'3 Standard
Basic
Interbus
Standard
Basic
Fipio
Standard
Modbus plus Standard
Ethernet
Standard
Number of starter-controllers
LUCA ppBL LUCB ppBL LUCM ppBL
LUCC ppBL
LUCD ppBL
17
17
15
12
12
12
18
18
16
12
12
12
9
8
8
9
8
8
2
2
1
2
2
1
4
4
4
17
17
15
32
32
32
Number of controllers
LUCB pp
LUCD pp
LUCM pp
15
12
16
12
8
8
1
1
4
15
32
References
Description
Item
Reference
LUL C15
14
LU9 RFL15
16
End of segment (EOS)
STB XBE1100
11
STB XBE1300
Beginning of segment (BOS)
18
Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.
14
Weight
kg
0.108
19
Description
Pre-wired coil connection
Item
Reference
19
20
LU9B N11L
LU9M RL
Weight
kg
0.050
0.450
b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL
may be used.
Cables
Description
14
&DEOHVWWHGZLWK
connectors,
one straight
and one elbowed
Length
m
0.3
1
3
5
20
&DEOHVWWHGZLWK
two straight connectors
0.3
1
3
0.012
Item
Reference
12
12
12
12
17
17
LU9 RCD03
Weight
kg
0.045
LU9 RCD10
0.065
LU9 RCD30
0.125
LU9 RCD50
1.500
LU9 RDD03
0.045
LU9 RDD10
0.065
LU9 RDD30
0.125
10
1/91
Presentation
TeSys U starter-controllers
Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil
connection components
Presentation
LUL C033
LUL C031
1
510624
566970
Communication modules LUL C031 and LUL C033 enable the TeSys U startercontroller to be connected to the Modbus network.
They must have a c 24 V supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V
control unit, LUCp ppBL.
They incorporate a 0.5 A, c 24 V discrete output for local command requirements.
7KHPRGXOH/8/&DOVRKDVWZRFRQJXUDEOHGLVFUHWHLQSXWV
Architecture
Star topology
35
Bus topology
2
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
To PLC
11
11 12
7
8
9
10
Control unit
Starter status
(ready, running, fault)
Start and Stop commands
Thermal overload alarm
Remote reset via the bus
Indication of motor load
Fault signalling and differentiation
Remote programming and monitoring of all
functions
Log function
Monitoring function
Alarms (overcurrent, ...)
Functions performed
Standard
Advanced
Multifunction
For more detailed information, please refer to Users Manual LU9 CD1, see page
opposite.
10
1/92
LUL C031
LUL C033
References
TeSys U starter-controllers
Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil
connection components
V1.04
V1.05
V1.06
V1.10 (1)
LUL C031
V2.3 (1)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LUL C033
V2.2 (1)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
V2.11 (1)
LUL C031
V2.3 (1)
No
No
LUL C033
V2.1 (1)
Yes
Yes
511527
References
Description
Item
Reference
LUL C031
7
LUL C033
7
Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.
Weight
kg
0.080
0.080
566967
LU2B pp
Item
Reference
8
13
LU9B N11C
5
Weight
kg
0.045
LU9M RC
0.030
b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
may be used.
7
Modbus hub
8 slaves
&DEOHVWWHGZLWK
2 x RJ45 connectors
Length
m
Item
Reference
10
LU9 GC3
0.3
9
9
9
11
11
12
0.045
0.065
0.125
0.032
0.032
VW3 A8 306 R
0.012
1
3
13
T-junctions (1)
0.3
1
Weight
kg
0.260
Language
Reference
Multi-language (3)
LU9 CD1
Weight
kg
0.022
(1) Fitted with 2 x RJ45 female connectors (bus side) and a 0.3 m or 1 m length cable supplied
with an RJ45 male connector (station side).
(2) The CD-Rom contains users manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication
modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway
programming software.
(3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
1/93
10
Presentation,
description,
setting-up
Presentation
Communication gateways LUF P allow connection between the Modbus serial link
DQG)LSLR3UREXV'3RU'HYLFH1HWHOGEXVHV
$IWHUFRQJXUDWLRQWKHVHJDWHZD\VPDQDJHLQIRUPDWLRQZKLFKFDQEHDFFHVVHGE\
the Modbus serial link and make this information available for read/write functions
FRPPDQGPRQLWRULQJFRQJXUDWLRQDQGDGMXVWPHQWRQWKHHOGEXVHV
An LUF P communication gateway consists of a box which can be clipped onto a
35 mm omega rail, allowing connection of up to 8 Slaves connected on the Modbus
serial link.
Example of architecture
LUF P
524177
Fipio
3UREXV'3
DeviceNet
&RQJXUDWLRQ
of gateway
by PC
TeSys U starter-controllers
(1)
Modbus
Description
Front panel of the product
1 LED indicating :
- communication status of the Modbus serial links,
- gateway status,
FRPPXQLFDWLRQVWDWXVRIWKH)LSLR3UREXV'3RU'HYLFH1HWEXV
2 &RQQHFWRUVIRUFRQQHFWLRQWR)LSLR3UREXV'3RU'HYLFH1HWEXVHV
2
561512
Underside of product
3 RJ45 connector for connection of the Modbus serial link
4 RJ45 connector for link to a PC
5 c 24 V power supply
3
Software set-up
For the Fipio bus, software set-up of the gateway is performed using either PL7
0LFUR-XQLRU3URVRIWZDUHRU$%&&RQJXUDWRUVRIWZDUH
)RUWKH3UREXV'3DQG'HYLFH1HWEXVHVVRIWZDUHVHWXSLVSHUIRUPHGXVLQJ
$%&&RQJXUDWRU
This software is included in the TeSys U users manual.
(1) Connection kit for PowerSuite software workshop (see page 1/74).
10
Characteristics, references:
page 1/95
1/94
Dimensions:
page 1/95
Schemes:
page 1/118
Characteristics,
references,
dimensions
Characteristics
Bus type
Environment
Ambient air temperature
Degree of protection
Electromagnetic
compatibility
Emission
Immunity
Number of Modbus slaves which can be connected
Connection
Modbus
To a PC
Field bus
Supply
Consumption
Max.
Typical
Indication/diagnostics
Services
V
mA
mA
3UROH
Command
Monitoring
&RQJXUDWLRQDQGDGMXVWPHQW
Fipio
3UREXV'3
DeviceNet
Degree of pollution: 2
+ 5+ 50
IP 20
Conforming to IEC 50081-2: 1993
Conforming to IEC 61000-6-2: 1999
y8
By RJ45 connector conforming to Schneider Electric RS485 standard
By RJ45 connector, with PowerSuite connection kit
By SUB D9 female
By 5-way removable
By SUB D9 female
connector
connector
screw connector
External supply, c 24 10 %
280
100
By LED on front panel
FED C32 or FED C32P
FRQJXUDEOHZRUGV(1)
FRQJXUDEOHZRUGV
FRQJXUDEOHZRUGV
FRQJXUDEOHZRUGV(1)
FRQJXUDEOHZRUGV
FRQJXUDEOHZRUGV
By gateway mini messaging facility (PKW)
References
Description
Communication
gateways
With bus/
serial link
Fipio/Modbus
3UREXV'30RGEXV
DeviceNet/Modbus
Reference
Weight
kg
0.245
0.245
0.245
LUF P1
LUF P7
LUF P9
Connectors
Reference
Weight
kg
VW3 A8 306 D30
0.150
Connection accessories
822631
Description
Connection cables
Length
m
3
Fipio
0.3
1
3
3UREXVPLGOLQH
3UREXVOLQHHQG
822713
TSX FP ACC 12
Connectors
0.050
0.050
0.150
0.040
Documentation
Description
Users manual for
TeSys U range (2)
Medium
Language
Reference
CD-Rom
LU9 CD1
Weight
kg
0.022
Dimensions
120
75
27
,IWKHJDWHZD\LVFRQJXUHGXVLQJ3/DQGQRW$%&&RQJXUDWRUWKH,2FDSDFLW\LVOLPLWHG
to a total of 26 words.
(2) This CD-Rom contains users manuals for AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules,
multifunction control units and gateways, as well as for the gateway programming software,
$%&&RQJXUDWRU
Presentation, description:
page 1/94
Setting-up:
page 1/94
Schemes:
page 1/118
1/95
10
Characteristics
Environment
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
600
kV
Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400
Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 400
Conforming to standards
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Rated impulse
withstand voltage (Uimp)
Safety separation of circuits
SELV
Degree of protection
Front panel outside connection
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone
(protection against
Front panel and wired terminals
GLUHFWQJHUFRQWDFW
Other faces
Protective treatment
IP 40
IP 20
IP 20
7+
Cycles 12
h
48
C
- 40+ 85
C
Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25 + 70.
(At temperatures above 60C and up to 70C, for starter-controller LUB32, leave a
minimum gap of 9 mm between products).
Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25+ 60.
(At temperatures above 45 C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products.
At temperatures above 55 C and up to 60 C, leave a gap of 20 mm between
products.)
m
2000
30
90
6
30
Flame resistance
C
C
Environmental restrictions
Shock resistance
1/2 sine wave = 11 ms
Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27
(1)
Vibration resistance
5300 Hz
Resistance to
electrostatic discharge
Immunity to fast
transient currents
Immunity to dissipated
shock waves
Immunity to conducted
high-frequency disturbance
10
Conforming to UL 94
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60695-2-12
Radiated emission
and conducted
V2
960 (parts supporting live components)
650
Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable
Power poles open: 10 gn
Power poles closed: 15 gn
kV
kV
V/m
kV
kV
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
(2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.
References :
pages 1/62 to 1/71
1/96
Dimensions :
pages 1/110 and 1/111
Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119
90
Characteristics
TeSys U starter-controllers
Power bases and control units
LUB 12 + LUCA
or LUCB or LUCC
or LUCD
LUB 32 + LUCA
or LUCB or LUCC
or LUCD
LUB 12 +
LUCM
LUB 32 +
LUCM
LU2M
LU6M
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m
2.510
2.510
1.56
1.56
16
16
16
16
110
110
16
16
3KLOLSVQRUDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
1.92.5
1.92.5
2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
1.92.5
1.92.5
1.92.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
3KLOLSVQRUDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
0.81.2
0.81.2
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.81.2
0.81.2
0.81.2
24240
24240
24220
24220
2027
2027
2026.5
2026.5
a 38.572. c 38.593
a 88264
a 88264
c 88242
c 88242
14.5
14.5
14.5
14.5
29
29
55
55
130
220
140
220
280
280
280
280
60
80
70
90
35
45
35
25
2
3
99u 72 V: 50
35
35
3
3
At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms
15
15
3600
3600
24
2028
14.5
150
70
1.7
75
35
3
24
2028
14.5
200
75
1.8
65
35
3
15
3600
15
3600
120
2360
2300
1000
120
(2)
(2)
(2)
3
3
Yes
Yes
SDGORFNZLWKPPVKDQN
12
32
T y 70C: 12A
T y 70C: 32A
T y 70C: 12A
T y 70C: 32A
690 (3)
690 (3)
4060
4060
3
6
9
12 18 25 32
0.1 0.3 0.6 1.1 2.4 4.6 7.5
3
Yes
3
Yes
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m
a 50/60 Hz
c
Voltage limits
Operation
c 24 V (1)
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V
c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
Drop-out
Typical consumption
I max while closing
I rms sealed
Heat dissipation
Operating time
Closing
Opening
Resistance to micro-breaks
Resistance to voltage dips IEC/EN 61000-4-11
Mechanical durability
In millions of operating cycles
Maximum operating rate
In operating cycles per hour
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
W
ms
ms
ms
V
Hz
A
W
12
32
4060
4060
V
230
440
500
690
kA
50
50
10
4
ms
2
2
2
kAs
90
120
90
120
(1) Voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %.
(2) No consumption sealed. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0.
10
1/97
Characteristics
6SHFLFFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRISRZHUEDVHV/8%DQGUHYHUVHUEORFNV/80RU/80
a 50/60 Hz ms
c
ms
Without change of direction
ms
With change of direction
ms
25
15
75
150
Conventional
For ambient temperatureT< 70 C
thermal current (Ith)
Frequency of the operational current
U min
Minimum switching capacityO = 10-8
I min
Short-circuit
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
protection
Short-time rating
Permissible for
1s
500 ms
100 ms
Insulation resistance
Non-overlap time
Guaranteed between
N/C and N/O contacts
Hz
V
mA
A
Up to 400
17
5
gG fuse: 4
A
A
A
m:
ms
30
40
50
10
2 (on energisation and on de-energisation)
6SHFLFFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWVEXLOWLQWRWKHSRZHUEDVH
Linked contacts
Mirror contact
V
V
V
Each power base has 1 N/O contact and 1 N/C contact which are mechanically linked
7KH1&FRQWDFWWWHGLQHDFKSRZHUEDVHUHOLDEO\UHSUHVHQWVWKHVWDWHRIWKHSRZHU
contacts (safety scheme)
Up to ac 250
690
600
6SHFLFFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWVLQPRGXOHV/8)1RIDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWV/8$
and of reverser blocks LU2M and LU6M
V
V
V
Up to ac 250
250
250
V
VA
24
60
48
120
115
280
230
560
400
960
440 600
1050 1440
V
W
24
120
48
90
125
75
250
68
VA
16
32
80
160
280
300
420
70
50
38
33
VA
20
40
70
80
100
25
18
14
12
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
1 million
operating cycles
3 million
operating cycles
10 million
operating cycles
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
10
References :
pages 1/63 and 1/64
1/98
24 V
48 V
125 V
250 V
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,2
0,1
0,1
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
0,3 0,4
0,6 0,8 1
0,5 0,7 0,9
6
8 10
5
7 9
Current broken in A
Dimensions :
pages 1/110 and 1/111
0,1
0,1
0,2
Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119
0,3 0,4
0,6 0,8 1
0,5 0,7 0,9
3
4
6
8 10
5
7 9
Current broken in A
Characteristics
TeSys U starter-controllers
Control units
Short-circuit
protection
Motor type
Conforming to standard
Tripping class conforming to
UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Frequency limits of the operational current
Temperature compensation
Protection against phase imbalance
Tripping threshold
Tripping tolerance
3-phase
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14
10
Hz
C
4060
- 25+ 70
Yes
14.2 x Ir (setting current)
20 %
Short-circuit
protection
Hz
C
LUCB
3-phase
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508,
CSA C22-2 n14
10
LUCC
Single-phase
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508,
CSA C22-2 n14
10
LUCD
3-phase
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508,
CSA C22-2 n14
20
4060
- 25+ 70
Yes
14.2 x Ir max.
20 %
4060
- 25+ 55
14.2 x Ir max.
20 %
4060
- 25+ 70
Yes
14.2 x Ir max.
20 %
Communication
interface for
terminal on
enclosure door
Display
Auxiliary supply
Motor type
Conforming to standard
Tripping class conforming to
UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Frequency limits of the operational current
Temperature compensation
Physical interface
Connections
Protocol
Maximum transmission speed
Maximum return time
Type
Language version
Precision
Resolution
External type
Heat dissipation
bit/s
ms
V
W
5060
- 25+ 55
RS 485 multi-drop
RJ45 on front panel
Modbus RTU
VHOIFRQJXUDWLRQXSWRWKLVYDOXH
200
LCD, 2 lines of 12 characters
Multilanguage (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish)
5%
1 % of Ir
c 24, with maximum ripple of 10 %.
0.8
&RQJXUDWLRQWDEOHIRUSURWHFWLRQGHYLFHVDQGDODUPVRQPXOWLIXQFWLRQFRQWUROXQLWV/8&0
Tripping
Alarm
Adjustment of tripping
Adjustment of time before
Adjustment of alarm
threshold
tripping
threshold
Range
Default value Range
Default value Range
Default value
Overcurrent
Overload
Activated (1)
Activated (1)
Activated
317 Ir
0.532 A (2)
14.2
Ir min
Class: 530
Earth fault
Phase imbalance
Torque limitation
No-load running
Long starting time
Activated
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Activated
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
0.25 Ir min
1030 %
18 Ir
0.31 Ir
18 Ir
0.3 Ir min
10 %
2 Ir
0.5 Ir
Ir
0.11.2 s
0.220 s
130 s
1200 s
1200 s
0.1 s
5s
5s
10 s
10 s
10100 % of
85 %
the thermal state
0.25 Ir min 0.3 Ir min
1030 %
10 %
18 Ir
2 Ir
0.31 Ir
0.5 Ir
18 Ir
Ir
&RQJXUDWLRQRIDGGLWLRQDOIXQFWLRQVRQPXOWLIXQFWLRQFRQWUROXQLWV/8&0
Reset
Time before reset
Type of load
Language
Display
References :
pages 1/69 and 1/70
Factory setting
Manual
120 s
3-phase motor
Self-cooled
English
Average current
Setting range
Manual, automatic or remote
11000 s
3-phase motor, single-phase motor
Self-cooled, force cooled
English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
Average current, thermal state of motor, current in phase 1 / 2 / 3, earth leakage current, phase imbalance, cause of
last 5 faults
(1) This function cannot be deactivated.
(2) The setting range depends on the rating of the control unit used.
Dimensions :
pages 1/110 and 1/111
Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119
1/99
10
Characteristics
690
32
I rms
kA
V
kA
50
440
690
130
70
Directly on the upstream terminals of the starter-controller
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
1.510
1.5...6
110
16
1...6
1...6
3KLOOLSVQRUDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
1.92.5
Mounting
Cabling
Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end
Flexible cable with cable end
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
N.m
I rms
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
690
63
A
V
kA
1000
440
100
Separate
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
1.525
1.5...10
1.525
2.510
1.516
1.54
3KLOOLSVQRUDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
2.2
N.m
690
35
Activation threshold
Hysteresis between activation and switching off
Display
Supply
Discrete output characteristics
Type
AC-15
DC-13
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
For ambient
A
temperatureT< 70 C
Short-circuit protection
Conforming to
A
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Type
AC-15
DC-13
For ambient
temperatureT< 70 C
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Conductor c.s.a.
Length
Reset input
References :
pages 1/66 and 1/71
1/100
LUF DH11
LUF DA01
By LED on front panel
a/c 24 240
7 at c 24
1.1 at a 240
1 N/C+ 1 N/O
1 N/C
9PD[9$RSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
9:RSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
V
mA
Discrete outputs
Short-circuit protection
10
gG fuse: 2
Dimensions :
pages 1/110 and 1/111
gG fuse: 2
mm2
m
0.2 min
500 (R = 50 : , L = 52.8 mH, Cp = 93 pF)
Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119
LUF DA10
1 N/O
Characteristics
TeSys U starter-controllers
Function modules and communication modules
Signal characteristics
with advanced control unit
Signal characteristics
with multifunction control unit
Minimum
Maximum
Typical
Precision
k:
:
:
Precision
Resolution
4 - 20 mA
Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 2 for LUCB and LUCD
Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 3 for LUCC
500
100
6%
10 %
1 % of Ir
External c 24 V
Supply
C
ms
On the
AS-Interface bus
On 24 V supply
for the outputs
Auxiliary supply
Number of outputs
Switching capacity of the solid state outputs
Indication/diagnostics
V
mA
mA
mA
V
ASILUF C5
AS-Interface V2.1 n 52901
7.D.F.0
Operation - 25+ 70
5
31 slaves
29.5...31.5
Normal operation: 25
Fault condition: 30
200
ASILUF C51
AS-Interface V2.1 n 52303
7.A.7.E
10
62 slaves
c 24 30 %
2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation
0.5 A/24 V (outputs protected against short-circuits)
By 2 LEDs on front panel
bit/s
ms
C
Number
Supply
Input current
Nominal input values Voltage
Current
Response time
Change to state 1
Change to state 0
Input type
Solid state
outputs
Protection
Switching capacity
Indication/diagnostics
Number
Supply
Max. current
gI fuse
V
mA
V
mA
ms
ms
V
mA
A
LUL C031
RS 485 multi-drop
RJ45 on front panel
Modbus RTU
VHOIFRQJXUDWLRQXSWRWKLVYDOXH
30
By switches: from 0...31
Operation - 25+ 55
c 24 (positive logic)
7
10 ( 30 %)
10 ( 30 %)
Resistive
LUL C033
6
WREHDVVLJQHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFRQJXUDWLRQ
c 24
7
10
1/101
Characteristics (continued)
&KDUDFWHULVWLFVRI&$1RSHQ3UREXV'3DQG'HYLFH1HWFRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHV
3UREXV'3
LUL C07
NA
3UREXV'3
CANopen
LUL C08
S 20 (Schneider Electric)
CIADS-301 V4.02
DR 303-2
Protocol
Address
LVSG V1.0
MS (Motor Starter) and
MMS (Motor Management
Starter)
3UREXV'3
1125
Physical interface
Binary rate
Cables
Communication module
Services
Conformity class
Standard
3UROH
2
Structure
3
Supply for the
discrete outputs
and control
5
Discrete outputs
c 24 V
Current consumption
Protection by gl fuse
Number
Supply
Input current
Nominal input values Voltage
Current
Response time
Change to state 1
Change to state 0
Input type
Number
Max. current
Short-circuit protection
Switching capacity
2SHQ6W\OHFRQQHFWRU
125500 kbaud
V
A
A
2028
1.5 (max)
2
Operation -25+55
V
mA
V
mA
ms
ms
WREHDVVLJQHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFRQJXUDWLRQ
c 24
7
c 24 (positive logic)
7
10 ( 30%)
10 ( 30%)
Resistive
mA
Indication/diagnostics
Physical interface
Connections
Protocol
Transmission speed
Addressing
Supply for the
c 24 V
discrete outputs Current consumption
and control
Protection by gl fuse
Ambient air temperature
Discrete inputs
Number
Supply
Input current
Nominal input values Voltage
Current
Response time
Change to state 1
Change to state 0
Input type
Discrete outputs
10
Number
Max. current
Short-circuit protection
Switching capacity
Indication/diagnostics
CAN
Fire Wire
CAN 2.0 and CAN 2.B (passive mode)
kbit/s 800
Self-addressing
V
2028
A
1.5 (max)
A
2
C
Operation - 25+ 55
V
mA
V
mA
ms
ms
1/102
mA
DeviceNet
LUL C09
NA
IEC 62026-1,
overvoltage category III,
degree of pollution: 3
ODVA (Open DeviceNet
Vendor Association)
MS (Motor Starter)
WREHDVVLJQHGDFFRUGLQJWRFRQJXUDWLRQ
c 24
7
c 24 (positive logic)
7
10 ( 30 %)
10 ( 30 %)
Resistive
3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation
500
Yes
0.5 A / c 24 V
By 3 LEDs on front panel
Characteristics(continued)
TeSys U starter-controllers
Function modules and communication modules
Connection characteristics
Module type
LUF W10,
LUF DH11,
LUF DA01 and
LUF DA10
LUF V2
5.08
3.81
Inputs and 24 V
auxiliary supply
5.08
Connectors
Pitch
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor
mm
0.21.5
0.141
0.21.5
0.141
2 identical conductors
mm
0.21
0.140.75
0.21
0.140.75
1 conductor
mm
0.251.5
0.251
0.251.5
0.251
2 identical conductors
mm
0.251
0.250.34
0.251
0.250.34
With
insulated
ferrule
1 conductor
mm
0.251.5
0.250.5
0.251.5
0.250.5
2 identical conductors
(Use a double cable end)
mm
0.51
0.5
0.51
0.5
1 conductor
mm
0.21.5
0.141
0.21.5
0.141
2 identical conductors
mm
0.21
0.140.5
0.21
0.140.5
AWG 24 AWG 16
AWG 26 AWG 16
AWG 24 AWG 16
AWG 26 AWG 16
Solid cable
without cable end
Conductor size
1 conductor
3.81
Tightening torque
N.m
0.50.6
0.200.25
0.50.6
0.200.25
Flat screwdriver
mm
3.5
2.5
3.5
2.5
LUL C031,
LUL C033,
LUL C08 and
LUL C15
LUFC 00
LUL C09
3.81
3.81
Inputs and 24 V
auxiliary supply
3.81
Module type
Connectors
Pitch
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor
mm
0.141
0.141
0.141
Connection
on the bus
5 (Open Style)
DeviceNet
0.22.5
2 identical conductors
mm
0.140.75
0.140.75
0.140.75
0.51.5
1 conductor
mm
0.251
0.251
0.251
0.252.5
2 identical conductors
mm
0.250.34
0.250.34
0.250.34
0.251
With
insulated
ferrule
1 conductor
mm
0.250.5
0.250.5
0.250.5
0.252.5
2 identical conductors
(Use a double cable end)
mm
0.5
0.5
0.75
0.51.5
1 conductor
mm
0.141
0.141
0.141
0.22.5
2 identical conductors
mm
0.140.5
0.140.5
0.140.5
0.140.5
AWG 26 AWG 16
AWG 26 AWG 16
AWG 26 AWG 16
AWG 24 AWG 16
Solid cable
without cable end
Conductor size
1 conductor
Tightening torque
N.m
0.200.25
0.200.25
0.200.25
0.50.6
Flat screwdriver
mm
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.5
10
1/103
Curves
1000
100
3
10
3
1
4
0,1
1
10
12
14
20
30
x the setting current (Ir)
Time (s)
100
2
10
0,1
1
10
References :
page 1/69
1/104
10
12
14
20
30
x the setting current (Ir)
Curves (continued)
TeSys U starter-controllers
Time (s)
1000
100
10
Class 30
Class 25
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
Class 5
5
0,1
1
9 10
12
11
13
14 16 18 20
30
15 17 19
x the setting current (Ir)
10
References :
page 1/70
1/105
Curves (continued)
10000
1000
100
10
4
Class 30
Class 25
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
Class 5
5
0,1
1
9 10
12
11
10
References :
page 1/70
1/106
13
14 16 18 20
30
15 17 19
x the setting current (Ir)
Curves (continued)
TeSys U starter-controllers
Ue = 460 V
100
10
4
0,1
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6 0,8 1
8 10
20
30
40
60 80 100
Prospective Isc (kA)
Ue = 460 V
1000
6
1
100
10
8
1
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8 1
8 10
20
30
40
60 80 100
Prospective Isc (kA)
1 32 A power base
2 12 A power base
10
References :
page 1/62
1/107
Selection
LUB 12
LUB 32
10
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
1
6 7 8 9 10 12
32 40
Current broken in A
6
5
4
3
5
4
3
1
0,8
1
0,8
0,6
0,6
0,5
0,5
5,5
1,5
7,5
32 40
Current broken in A
6 7 8 9 10 12
2,2
0,75
0,55
15
11
7,5
5,5
2,2
0,75
0,55
230 V
10
References:
page 1/62
1/108
15
11
7,5
5,5
2,2
1,5
0,75
0,55
440 V
kW
kW
kW
LUB 32
400 V
10
8
LUB 32
10
8
1,5
LUB 12
Ue = 690 V
LUB 12
Ue y 440 V
6 7 8 9 10 12
32 40
21
Current broken in A
Selection
TeSys U starter-controllers
Ue = 690 V
LUB 12
LUB 32
LUB 12
LUB 32
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,05
0,04
0,06
0,05
0,04
0,03
0,03
0,02
0,02
0,01
2
10
20
30
40
50 66 100
200
60 80
170
Current broken in A
0,3
0,1
0,08
0,01
1
10
20
30
200
50 60
100
40 54 80
126
Current broken in A
10
References:
page 1/62
1/109
Dimensions
Dimensions
Starter-controllers
LUB: non-reversing
LU2B: reversing
6FUHZ[LQJ
Rail mounting
126
X1
126
30
6FUHZ[LQJ
Rail mounting
29
(2)
(2)
a (1)
45
X2
233237
224
120/125
X1
154
163167
73
X2
135 (1)
45
135
:LWK$GYDQW\V67%&$1RSHQ3UREXV'3
or DeviceNet modules
147
6FUHZ[LQJ
115
104
Rail mounting
113
36
113
45
GV1 G09
95
38
18
a
l
179
45
206
54
GV2 G554
89
98
Number of tap-offs
224
269
314
359
134
260
314
368
422
152
30
82
AK5 JB144
45
81
79
10
438
452
(1) Depth with communication module.
(2) 5HWUDFWDEOH[LQJOXJV.
1/110
38
35,5
Dimensions (continued),
mounting
Dimensions, mounting
Current limiter LA9 LB920
93
115
103
154
146
0
45
a (1)
51
53,5
a
With Modbus module
135
147
LU9 AP00
Door cut-out
45
55
171230
11,5
= =
54
162
162
230
230
= =
54
11,5
508
Addressing consoles
XZ MC11
ASI TERV2
195
209
80
84
30
35
Splitter boxes
/8*&3UREXV'3
6FUHZ[LQJ
Rail mounting
6FUHZ[LQJ
4 (2)
128
45
128
30
65
45
163167
170
154
163167
4 (2)
65
10
30
1/111
Schemes
Starter-controllers, 12 or 32 A
With standard, advanced or multifunction control unit
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
22/NC
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
21/NC
14/NO
Control Unit
A2
A1
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
Control Unit
Pre-wired
82
84
81
A2
B1
A1
B3
A3
A2
B1
A3
A2
A1
V 6
U 2
A1
LU2B
6/T3
B3
22/NC
21/NC
Control Unit
14/NO
13/NO
4/T2
Reverser
2/T1
5 L2
13/NO
5/L3
Non-reversing
3/L2
Non-reversing
1/L1
Reverser blocks
LU2M
LU6M
B1
A1
B3
A2
Reverser Block
LU6M
A3
S3
S2
S1
S3
S2
S1
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
Reverser
82
84
81
A2
B1
A1
B3
LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil
LU6M
21
22
S3
S1
14
S2
A2
B1
A1
A3
B3
LU2M
A2
13
Basic scheme
A1
A3
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
Reverser Block
LU6M
S3
S2
S1
95/NC
96/NC
97/NO
98/NO
67
17/NO
68
18/NO
LUA8 E20
57
17/NO
1/112
A2
A3 Reverse
LUA1 C20
58
10
LUA1 C11
A1 Forward
B3 Reverse
B1 Forward
(1)
LUFN 20
LUFN 11
LUFN 02
33/NO
34/NO
43/NO
44/NO
31/NC
32/NC
43/NO
44/NO
31/NC
32/NC
41/NC
42/NC
Schemes (continued)
Control units
Standard control units LUCA
Basic scheme
Basic schemehd
1
LUCA
LUCp
Power Base
Interface
Sensor
L1
Sensor
L1
Control
A.S.I.C.
Sensor
L2
Power Base
Interface
Control
A.S.I.C.
Sensor
L2
tr
tr
Sensor
L3
Sensor
L3
Therm. overload
Supply and
Detection of
start
sequence
memory
Interface module
7
1 and 2 Trips
3 and 4 Electromagnet
5 Power base rating
6 N/C
Test
A2
A1
Thermal
overload
memory
A2
A1
Supply and
Detection of
start
sequence
9 10 11
12
1 and 2 Trips
3 and 4 Electromagnet
5 Power base rating
6 N/C
7 Earth
8 Thermal status/Set
9 Reset mode/Reset
10 (lm/Ir)
11 Vc2
12 Vc1
D(B)
D(A)
+5V
0V
LUCM
24 V Aux
4 5 7
6 8
Basic scheme
1
LUCM
Power Base
Interface
Sensor
L1
Sensor
L2
Display and
Parameter Entry
ESC
Control
A.S.I.C.
Sensor
L3
ENT
RS485
Supply and
detection of
start
sequence
Thermal
overload
memory
D(B)
D(A)
+5V
0V
4
5
RJ45
7
8
Supply
Interface module
A2
A1
24 V Aux
7
9 10 11 12
1 and 2 Trips
3 and 4 Electromagnet
5 Power base rating
6 N/C
7 Earth
8 N/C
9 Earth
10 (lm/Ir)
11 Rx/Tx
12 Vc1
10
1/113
Schemes (continued)
Function modules
Alarm
LUF W10
LUF V2
4-20 mA output
LUFV 2
Alarms Module
LUFW 10
08
07
24 V Aux
NC
24 V Aux
4...20 mA
Basic scheme
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit
LUFW 10
Input interface
LED
LUFV 2
Input interface
Supply
Supply
P - Analogue/Digital
converter
Isolation
08
Digital/Analogue
converter
07
Relais bistable
Voltage/Current converter
4...20 mA
5
100 : < load < 500 : c 30 V max and 40 mA min
Communication modules
Communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
AS-Interface Module
AS-Interface Module
AS-i
LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil
Basic scheme
ASILUF C5
or
Ready-Fault-Pole
DEL
10
ASILUF C51
A2SI
1/114
OA1
Com
Output interface
OA3
AS-i
AS-Interface Module
AS-i
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil
AS-i
OA3
OA1
Com
Schemes (continued)
D(B)
D(A)
0V
LI2
LO1
OA3
LI1
24 V
Aux
D(B)
D(A)
0V
LI2
24 V
c
COM
4 5 8
6
Basic scheme
LI2
LI1
LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil
4 5 8
24 V
c
24 V
Aux
D(B)
D(A)
0V
Modbus Module
LUL C033
LO1
D(B)
D(A)
0V
Modbus Module
24 V Aux
Com
4 5 8
6
LUL C031
LO1
COM
Modbus Module
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil
4 5 8
6
LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil
24 V
Aux
LUL C033
LI1
24 V Aux
Com
LO1
D(B)
D(A)
0V
Modbus Module
LUL C031
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil
24 V
c
LO1
OA1
4 5 8
6
Modbus Module
LUL C033
Com
LO1
24 V Aux
Com
OA3
OA1
Com
D(B)
D(A)
0V
Modbus Module
LUL C031
COM
4 5 8
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit
Controller
x6
LUL C031
LED
Ready-Fault-Pole
Address
D(B)
RS485
D(A)
0V
LED
Controller
interface
Ready-Fault-Pole
Address
D(B)
4
5 Modbus
RJ45
8
RS485
5 Modbus
RJ45
8
Supply
LI2
LI1
I/O interface
LO1
OA3
24 V Aux
Output interface
Com
AL2
OA1
Com
LO1
OA3
OA1
AL1
Supply
Com
D(A)
0V
AL1
Output interface
24 V
LUL C033
Input interface
AL2
24 V
c
24 V
Aux
COM
10
1/115
Schemes (continued)
LI2
LI1
LO1
LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil
LI2
Bus
LI2
LO1
LI2
LI1
LO1
Canopen Module
LUL C08
Bus
LI1
3UREXV'30RGXOH
Basic scheme
Bus
LUL C07
LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil
LO1
LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil
Canopen Module
LUL C08
Bus
LI2
LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil
LI1
LO1
3UREXV'30RGXOH
LUL C07
Bus
LI1
Com
LI2
LI1
LO1
Com
OA1
OA3
Bus
Canopen Module
LUL C08
OA1
3UREXV'30RGXOH
LUL C07
OA3
Basic scheme
Controller
Controller
x6
x6
LUL C07
Control unit interface
LED
LUL C08
Control unit interface
Controller
interface
Ready-Fault-Pole
Address
LED
Controller
interface
Ready-Fault-Pole
Address
6
AL1
AL1
Supply
Supply
AL2
LI2
LO1
Com
OA1
OA3
LI1
I/O interface
AL2
LI2
LI1
LO1
Com
OA1
OA3
I/O interface
Basic scheme
Controller
x6
DeviceNet Module
LUL C09
LUL C09
Control unit interface
LI2
LI1
LO1
Com
OA1
Bus
OA3
LED
Controller
interface
Ready-Fault-Pole
Address
DeviceNet Module
LUL C09
Supply
10
DeviceNet Module
LUL C09
1/116
LI2
LI1
LO1
Bus
AL2
LI2
LI1
LO1
Com
OA1
OA3
I/O interface
LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil
AL1
LI2
LI1
LO1
Bus
LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil
24 V c
Schemes (continued)
LUL C15
LUF C00
Link // RJ45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LUL C15
OA3
In Out
OA1
Com
LI2
LI1
LO1
Com
OA3
OA1
Bus
LUF C00
LI2
LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil
LI1
LO1
Bus
In Out
Link // RJ45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil
LUL C15
LUF C00
LI2
LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil
LI1
LO1
Bus
In Out
Basic scheme
Link // RJ45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil
Basic scheme
LUF C00
Controller
x6
Control unit interface
OA1
Ready-Fault-Pole
Address
OA3
Controller
interface
Com
LED
Ready
Fault
Pole
LUL C15
RJ45
1
OUT
IN
AL1
Supply
AL2
LI2
LI1
LO1
Com
OA1
OA3
I/O interface
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Forward running
Reverse running
Output common
Selector in position
Pole state
Reserved
Fault
Input common
3UREXV'3SRZHUVXSSO\PRGXOH/8*&
LU9 GC7
IN
OUT
Filter
24 V Aux.
10
1/117
Schemes (continued)
X2
RJ45
X5
X5
Forward running
N/C
Commun des sorties
N/C
Pole state RJ45
N/C
Fault
+ 24 V Aux
X10
X6
RJ45
X6
X7
RJ45
RJ45
X7
Shielding
RJ45
X8
(3)
Forward running X1
Forward running X2
Forward running X3
Forward running X4
Forward running X5
Forward running X6
Forward running X7
Forward running X8
Reverse running X1
Reverse running X2
Reverse running X3
Reverse running X4
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+ c 24 V
Com
+ c 24 V
Com
RJ45
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Com
Inputs
Com
Outputs
0V
Shielding
24 V Aux
0V
Shielding
D (A) +
D (B)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ45
X4
RJ45
X10
X8
(2)
Forward running X1
Forward running X2
Forward running X3
Forward running X4
Forward running X5
Forward running X6
Forward running X7
Forward running X8
Reverse running X1
Reverse running X2
Reverse running X3
Reverse running X4
Reverse running X5
Reverse running X6
Reverse running X7
Reverse running X8
+ c 24 V
Com
+ c 24 V
Com
X5
RJ45
RJ45
X3
Fault X1
Fault X2
Fault X3
Fault X4
Fault X5
Fault X6
Fault X7
Fault X8
Pole state X1
Pole state X2
Pole state X3
Pole state X4
Pole state X5
Pole state X6
Pole state X7
Pole state X8
+ 24 V Aux
Com
+ 24 V Aux
Com
RJ45
Colours of
TSX CDPppp
connection
cable wires
(4)
1 White
2 Brown
3 Green
4 Yellow
5 Grey
6 Pink
7 Blue
8 Red
9 Black
10 Violet
11 Grey-pink
12 Red-blue
13 White-green
14 Brown-green
15 White-yellow
16 Yellow-brown
17 White-grey
18 Grey-brown
19 White-pink
20 Pink-brown
X10
X6
RJ45
(3)
X7
RJ45
X8
RJ45
24 V Aux
Com
RJ45
RJ45
Inputs
X4
RJ45
X4
RJ45
(2)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
X3
X2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ45
RJ45
X9
Com
X3
N/C
N/C
N/C
D (B)
RJ45 D (A) +
N/C
24 V
(1)
0V
Fault X1
Fault X2
Fault X3
Fault X4
Fault X5
Fault X6
Fault X7
Fault X8
Pole state X1
Pole state X2
Pole state X3
Pole state X4
Pole state X5
Pole state X6
Pole state X7
Pole state X8
+ 24 V Aux
Com
+ 24 V Aux
Com
Outputs
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ45
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
X9
X9
LU9 G03
X1
Forward running
Reverse running
Output common
N/C
Pole state RJ45
+ 24 V
Fault
+ 24 V Aux
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LU9 G02
X1
Forward running
Reverse running
Output common
N/C
Pole state RJ45
N/C
Fault
+24 V Aux
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LU9 GC3
X1
N/C
N/C
N/C
D (B)
D (A) + RJ45
N/C
N/C
0V
X2
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Not connected on connectors X1 to X8. Only present on RJ45 IN and OUT connectors.
20-way HE10 input connector.
20-way HE10 output connector.
Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers.
Gateways
LUF P1
24 V Aux
X2 Fip I/O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
1/118
X1
4 5 8
LUF P7
24 V Aux
LUF P9
3UREXV0RGEXV*DWHZD\
X2 Profibus
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X1
4 5 8
LUF P9
24 V Aux
X1
D(B)
D(A)
0V
LUF P7
D(B)
D(A)
0v
LUF P1
D(B)
D(A)
0V
4 5 8
Schemes (continued)
'DWDSUROHXQGHU$6,QWHUIDFH
Control unit present in the product
Status
Standard
LUCA
D0
D1
D0
D1
Commands
Advanced
LUCB,
CC, CD
Multifunction
LUCM
Register 452
Register 455
Register 461
Register 465
Register 466
&RQJXUDWLRQ Register 602
Register 682
Commands
Register 700
Register 704
Ready (available)
Poles closed (running)
Start - forward running
Start - reverse running
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Bit 3
Word
Word
Short-circuit fault
Overcurrent fault
Thermal overload fault
Ready (available)
Poles closed
Fault
Alarms
Tripped ("TRIP" position)
Fault acknowledgement allowed
Reserved
Motor running
Motor current % (bit 0)
Motor current % (bit 1)
Motor current % (bit 2)
Motor current % (bit 3)
Motor current % (bit 4)
Motor current % (bit 5)
Reserved
Motor starting
Thermal overload alarm
Thermal status value
Motor load value (Im/Ir)
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Value 0
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 615
10
Data accessible
1/119
Basic schemes
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
V1 4/T2
W1 6/T3
U1 2/T1
Control Unit
M
3
4
A1
A2
A1
A2
4...20 mA
13
LUFV 2
Start
Stop
24 V Aux
24 V Aux
14
NC
5
Connection of thermal overload fault signalling modules LUF DA10
Automatic reset
V1
A2
08
A2
24230 V
X2
Z2
Z1
A1
QF1
X1
24230 V
X2
X1
Z1
Z2
LUF DA10
07
08
V1
07
A1
S2
QF1
S1
S1
Modbus
A2
10
1/120
A1
LI2
LI1
LO1
OA3
OA1
4 5 8
6
Modbus Module
LUL C033
Com
Com
LO1
OA3
24 V Aux
D(B)
D(A)
GND
Modbus Module
LUL C031
OA1
Com
S1
24 V 24 V
c Aux
COM
D(B)
D(A)
GND
Remote reset
4 5 8
6
S2
Modbus
A2
A1
TeSys U starter-controllers
Non-reversing
AS-Interface Module
ASILUF C5
or ASILUF C51
AS-Interface Module
OA3
OA1
Com
AS-Interface
AS-Interface line
Normal
A1
A2
or ASILUF C51
ASILUF C5
AS-Interface line
Adjustment
A2
OA3
OA1
Com
AS-Interface
A1
AS-Interface Module
AS-Interface Module
AS-Interface
OA3
OA1
AS-Interface
Com
LU9B N11C
Pre wired coil
5
AS-Interface line
AS-Interface line
Adjustment
A1
Normal
A2
AS-Interface Module
A2
OA3
OA1
Com
AS-Interface
A1
AS-Interface line
9
LUCM
D(B)
D(A)
GND
RJ45
24 V Aux
4 5 8
6
10
Bus Modbus
RS 485
1/121
TeSys U starter-controllers
Reversing
5/L3
LU2B
A2
B1
A3
A1
A2
B1
A1
A3
B3
LU2B
B3
3/L2
1/L1
Start
forward running
6/T3
4/T2
V1 4/T2
U1 2/T1
Stop
forward running
and reverse
running
forward running
Stop
reverse running
Stop
forward running
Start
reverse running
Stop
reverse running
W1 6/T3
2/T1
Control Unit
M
3
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact and limit switches
AS-Interface Module
LU2B
6
Stop forward
running
and reverse
running
D(B)
D(A)
GND
LUCM
24 V Aux
4 5 8
6
Bus Modbus
RS 485
OA3
OA1
Com
A1
B3
A3
A2
Reverser
Motor
Controller
LU2B
B1
AS-Interface
AS-Interface line
10
53
54
81
84
82
1/122
Stop
Limit switch
reverse running reverse running
Start
forward running
Start
reverse running
A2
B1
A1
A3
Stop
Limit switch
forward running forward running
AS-Interface line
B3
AS-Interface
LU9M RC
Pre wired coil
TeSys U starter-controllers
Reversing
LI2
LO1
LI1
OA3
OA1
24 V
c
24 V
Aux COM
4 5 8
6
Modbus
Adjustment
Start
forward running
Start
reverse running
Normal
Start reverse
running
5/L3
3/L2
Modbus
Normal
Adjustment
Start forward
running
D(B)
D(A)
GND
Modbus Module
LULC 033
Com
A2
B1
A1
B3
4 5 8
6
Reverser
Motor
Controller
LU2B
A3
24 V Aux
Com
LO1
OA3
OA1
Com
B1
A2
A1
B3
A3
Modbus Module
LUL C031
D(B)
D(A)
GND
Reverser
Motor
Controller
LU2B
5
6/T3
5/L3
W1
6/T3
4/T2
3/L2
V1
4/T2
2/T1
U1
2/T1
1/L1
Control Unit
M
3
A2
A1
S3
S2
S1
A2
B1
A1
B3
22
Reverser Block
LU6M
A2
B1
A1
A3
Stop
Start
reverse running reverse running
S7
S9
B3
Reverser Block
A3
LU6M
21
22
S3
S2
S1
21
Stop
forward running
and reverse
Stop
Start
running
forward running forward running
S5
S6
S8
A2
14
13
10
forward running
Stop
reverse running
1/123
Presentation
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
536566
Presentation
The Altistart U01 is a soft start/soft stop unit for asynchronous motors. It is designed
primarily for combinations with TeSys U starter-controllers.
3
2
The Altistart U01 is compact and easy to install. It complies with standards IEC/EN
FDUULHV8/&6$&7LFN&&&FHUWLFDWLRQVDQGe marking.
4
5
6
7
Description
6
9
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
1/124
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
Schemes:
pages 1/130 to 1/133
Presentation (continued)
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
Altistart U01 and TeSys U
3OHDVHFRQVXOWWKH7H6\V8VWDUWHUVRSHQYHUVLRQFDWDORJXH
b 3-wire control
The run and stop commands are controlled by 2 different logic inputs.
Stopping is achieved when logic input LI1 opens (state 0).
The pulse on input LI2 is stored until input LI1 opens.
Altistart U01 control terminals
+ 24 V
LI1
LI2
b Starting time
Controlling the starting time means that the time of the voltage ramp applied to the
motor can be adjusted to obtain a gradual starting time, dependent on the motor load.
b Voltage boost function via logic input
Activating the BOOST logic input enables the function for supplying a starting
overtorque capable of overcoming any mechanical friction.
When the input is at state 1, the function is active (input connected to the + 24 V) and
WKHVWDUWHUDSSOLHVD[HGYROWDJHWRWKHPRWRUIRUDOLPLWHGWLPHEHIRUHVWDUWLQJ
U
100%
Un
Voltage ramp
50%
Un
Initial voltage
t
200 ms
Application of a voltage boost equal to 100% of the nominal
motor voltage
b End of starting
v Application function for logic output LO1
ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units are equipped with an open collector logic
output LO, which indicates the end of starting when the motor has reached nominal
speed.
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
Schemes:
pages 1/131 to 1/133
1/125
Characteristics
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
Environmental characteristics
Type of starter
Conformity to standards
ATSU 01N2ppLT
Altistart U01 electronic starters have been developed to conform to the strictest
international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial
control devices (IEC, EN), in particular standard IEC/EN 60947-4-2.
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
Degree of protection
Degree of pollution
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Relative humidity
Ambient temperature around
the unit
Storage
Operation
C
C
m
10
Electrical characteristics
Type of starter
Category of use
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-2
Rated operating voltage
3-phase a voltage
Frequency
Output voltage
Control supply voltage
Rated operating current
Adjustable starting time
Adjustable deceleration time
Starting torque
Type of starter
ATSU
Control power supply consumption
Power dissipated
At full load at end of starting
In transient state at 5 times the
rated operating current
Type of starter
Use
I
Starting time
Starting time
Maximum number of cycles per
hour
V
Hz
A
s
s
%
W
W
ATSU 01N2ppLT
Ac-53b
200 - 10% to 480 + 10%
50 - 5% to 60 + 5%
Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to line supply voltage
24 V c, 100 mA 10%
6...32
1...10
1...10
30.... 80% of DOL motor starting torque
01N206LT
01N209LT
01N212LT
01N222LT
01N232LT
24 V c, 65 mA
24 V c, 100 mA
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
61.5
91.5
121.5
222.5
322.5
ATSU 01N206LT to ATSU 01N222LT
ATSU 01N232LT
1
100
1
50
5
20
10
10
t
Operating cycle
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
1/126
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
Schemes:
pages 1/130 to 1/133
5
10
10
5
Characteristics (continued)
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
Altistart U01 and TeSys U
24 V 10%
Isolated
Max. current 100 mA
Logic inputs with impedance 27 k:9SRZHUVXSSO\8PD[9
Max. current 8 mA
State 0 if U < 5 V and I < 0.2 mA
State 1 if U > 13 V and I > 0.5 mA
Open collector logic output:
External 24 V power supply (minimum 6 V, maximum 30 V)
Max. current 200 mA
Normally open (N/O) contact
Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for 6 V c
Maximum switching capacity on inductive load (cos M = 0.5 and L/R = 20 ms): 2 A for
250 V a or 30 V c (AC-15)
Maximum operating voltage 440 V
Starter powered up
Nominal voltage reached
LED signalling
Green LED
Yellow LED
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m
Tightening torque
1.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
1.92.5
8 AWG
10 AWG
10 AWG
10 AWG
8 AWG
10 AWG
0.52.5
0.51.5
0.51.5
0.51.5
0.52.5
0.51
0.5
14 AWG
16 AWG
16 AWG
16 AWG
14 AWG
17 AWG
The diagram opposite shows the torque/speed characteristic of a cage motor in relation to the
supply voltage.
7KHWRUTXHYDULHVLQOLQHZLWKWKHVTXDUHRIWKHYROWDJHDWD[HGIUHTXHQF\7KHJUDGXDOLQFUHDVH
in the voltage prevents the instantaneous current peak on power-up.
U
3 Tn
0,85 U
0,6 U
0,25
Screw connector
Control circuit
Flexible wire without cable
end
Tn
&RQQHFWLRQWRPPVFUHZFODPSV
Power circuit
Flexible wire without cable
end
2 Tn
0,5
Tr
0,75
N/Ns
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
Schemes:
pages 1/131 to 1/133
1/127
References
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
Motor
Motor power (1)
230 V 230 V
kW
HP
400 V
kW
460 V
HP
Starter
Nominal
current
Reference
Weight
kg
3
ATSU 01N222LT
2
3
ATSU 01N206LT
0.340
1.5
2.2
3
ATSU 01N209LT
0.340
2.2
3
5.5
7.5
12
ATSU 01N212LT
0.340
4
5.5
5
7.5
7.5
11
10
15
22
ATSU 01N222LT
0.490
7.5
10
15
20
32
ATSU 01N232LT
0.490
0.75
1.1
1
1.5
1.5
Accessorie
Description
Reference
ATSU 01N2ppLT
VW3 G4104
DF510362
LUBp2BL
Power connector between
ATSU 01N2ppLT and
TeSys U
Weight
kg
0.020
6
3
LUCM ppBL
Motor power
Voltage
230 V
400 V
kW/HP
kW
1.5
0.75/1
2.2/3
1.1/1.5
1.5/2
2.2/3
3/
5.5
4/5
7.5
11
5.5/7.5
15
7.5/10
Soft starter
460 V
HP
2
3
7.5
10
15
20
ATSU 01N206LT
ATSU 01N206LT
ATSU 01N209LT
ATSU 01N209LT
ATSU 01N212LT
ATSU 01N212LT
ATSU 01N222LT
ATSU 01N222LT
ATSU 01N232LT
TeSys U
Power base
LUB 12
LUB 12
LUB 12
LUB 12
LUB 12
LUB 32
LUB 32
LUB 32
LUB 32
LUCp 05BL
LUCp 12BL
LUCp 12BL
LUCp 12BL
LUCp 12BL
LUCp 18BL
LUCp 18BL
LUCp 32BL
LUCp 32BL
(1) Standard motor power ratings, HP power ratings indicated according to standard UL 508.
'HSHQGLQJRQWKHFRQJXUDWLRQRIWKHFKRVHQ7H6\V8VWDUWHUFRQWUROOHUUHSODFHWKHp with
A for standard, B for expandable, and M for multifunction.
ATSU 01N2ppLT
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
1/128
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
Dimensions:
page 1/129
Schemes:
pages 1/130 to 1/133
Dimensions
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
45
135
124
150
284
154
72,2
99
135
99
154
72,2
45
314
170
6
9
46,6
10
44,8
28
20
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
References:
page 1/128
Schemes:
pages 1/130 to 1/133
1/129
Schemes
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
3/L2
1/L1
5/L3
Power wiring
1/L1
QF1
QF1
TeSys U
CU
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
Tesys U
TeSys U
with
reversing
unit
CU
Tesys U
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
3/L2
5/L3
6/T3
A1
2/T1
M1
3
6/T3
ATSU 01N2ppLT
4/T2
4/T2
2/T1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
1/L1
A1
M1
3
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
1/130
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
Schemes (continued)
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
c 24 V
c 24 V
A1
LO1
BOOST
+ 24 V
LI2
COM
LI1
R1C
R1A
18
Stop
Run
LO1
BOOST
LI1
LI2
COM
R1C
R1A
18
+ 24 V
LUA1 C20
S1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
17
17
A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
LUA1 C20
A1
Stop
Run
S1
S2
A1
A2
QF1
A2
QF1
Functional diagrams
Power supply
voltage
Green LED
Power supply
voltage
Green LED
Yellow LED
Yellow LED
U1
U1
10 s
10 s
Motor voltage
Motor voltage
t1
t1
t2
With deceleration
c 24 V
c 24 V
A1
A1
A1
14
LO1
LI2
+ 24 V
LI1
R1C
COM
R1A
QF1
14
QF1
A2
A1
QF1
S1
QF1
A2
BOOST
17
18
LO1
+ 24 V
COM
LI2
S2
13
ATSU 01N2ppLT
LUA1 C20
13
S2
LI1
R1C
R1A
18
S1
BOOST
17
ATSU 01N2ppLT
LUA1 C20
Functional diagrams
Power supply
voltage
Green LED
Power supply
voltage
Green LED
500 ms
Pushbutton S1
Pushbutton S2
U1
Yellow LED
Yellow LED
10 s
Motor voltage
10 s
Motor voltage
t1
t1
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
10
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
1/131
Schemes (continued)
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
Run
direction 2
Run
direction 1
S1
Run
direction 1
S1
Run
direction 2
S2
S2
Stop
S3
Stop
S3
17
17
LUA1 C20
18
18
LUA1 C20
+
c 24 V
c 24 V
LO1
BOOST
LI2
+ 24 V
LI1
COM
R1C
R1A
ATSU 01N2ppLT
To PLC
7
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
1/132
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
LO1
+ 24 V
BOOST
LI2
LI1
R1A
ATSU 01N2ppLT
A2
B1
A1
B3
BOOST
LO1
LI2
+ 24 V
LI1
COM
R1C
R1A
A2
A1
LU2B p2BL
ATSU 01N2ppLT
B1
A1
B3
A3
LU2B p2BL
QF1
A1
COM
QF1
R1C
Without deceleration
A3
Schemes (continued)
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
c 24 V 24 V Aux.
D(B)
D(A)
Gnd
LO1
COM
OA3
COM
OA1
BOOST
+ 24 V
LI2
4 5 8
LI1
COM
R1A
c 24 V 24 V Aux.
D(B)
D(A)
Gnd
LO1
COM
LO1
BOOST
+ 24 V
LI2
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil
Modbus Module
LUL C031
ATSU 01N2ppLT
4 5 8
13
LI1
COM
R1C
Modbus Module
LUL C031
ATSU 01N2ppLT
A1
A1
R1C
A1
R1A
LO1
c 24 V
14
+
c 24 V
QF1
Value
0
1
0
1
0
3
A2
B1
A1
B3
A3
LU2B p2BL
Function
Register
Bit
Powering down TeSys U and ATSU
704
0
Function
Register
Bit
Value
Powering up TeSys U and ATSU
Forward
704
0
1
Reverse
704
1
1
Powering down TeSys U and ATSU
Forward
704
0
0
Reverse
704
1
0
Automatic control without deceleration
Run
700
0
1
Stop forward
704
0
0
Stop reverse
704
1
0
Automatic control with deceleration (forward or reverse)
Run
700
0
1
Soft stop
700
0
0
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit
A1
LO1
BOOST
+ 24 V
LI2
R1C
COM
R1A
LI1
COM
OA1
ASI LUFC5
A2
B1
A1
A3
c 24 V AS-Interface
LU9B N11C
+
Pre-wired coil +
B3
LU2B p2BL
OA3
BOOST
LO1
QF1
14
ASI LUFC5
ATSU 01N2ppLT
13
+ 24 V
LI2
LI1
COM
R1C
R1A
ATSU 01N2ppLT
c 24 V AS-Interface
c 24 V
c 24 V
9
Function
Bit
Value
Power-up and automatic control without deceleration
Run
D0
1
Stop
D0
0
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
Function
Bit
Value
Power-up and automatic control without deceleration
Run forward
D0
1
Stop
D0
0
Run reverse
D1
1
Stop
D1
0
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit
References:
page 1/128
10
Dimensions:
page 1/129
1/133
Presentation,
description,
references
Presentation
S1 (mm2 / AWG)
2
Note: control unit LUCL, when used in conjunction with power base LUB 12 or
LUB 32, conforms to standard IEC 60947-2.
S2 (mm2 / AWG)
LUB pp
LUCLpp
Installation regulations
When the length of the cable between the TeSys U starter and the variable speed
controller is more than 1.5 m, the c.s.a. of the cable between the variable speed
controller and the TeSys U starter (S2) must be equal to the c.s.a. of the cable
upstream of TeSys U (S1).
3
Altivar or Altistart
568027
Description
1
2
1
2
3
4
References
Description
Reference
A
Magnetic control unit
kg
0.150.6
LUCLX6pp
0.351.4
LUCL1Xpp
0.135
1.255
LUCL05pp
0.135
312
LUCL12pp
0.135
LUCL18pp
0.135
832
LUCL32pp
0.135
24
4872
BL (2), (3)
110240
c or a
ES (4)
FU (5)
10
1/134
0.135
4.518
(1) Standard control circuit voltage:
Volts
Weight
(1)
Selection
Maximum motor
power ratings 50/60 Hz
b Short-circuit protection
b Manual reset
Power base
reference
Control unit
reference
Line current
< 400/415 V
500 V
690 V
KW
KW
KW
0.09
LUB 12 or LUB 32
LUCLX6pp
0.150.6
0.25
LUB 12 or LUB 32
LUCL1Xpp
0.351.4
1.5
2.2
LUB 12 or LUB 32
LUCL05pp
1.255
5.5
5.5
LUB 12 or LUB 32
LUCL12pp
312
7.5
15
LUB 32
LUCL18pp
4.518
15
15
18.5
LUB 32
LUCL32pp
832
Operating characteristics
Control units
Standard
Advanced
LUCA
LUCB
Multifunction
LUCC
LUCD
LUCL
LUCM
Short-circuit protection
3 to 17 x the setting
current
10
10
20
Motor type
3-phase
Single-phase
3-phase
530
Single-phase and 3-phase
Manual
Automatic or remote
Integrated function
Compatibility
Compatibility of
control unit LUCLpp with
References
Functions
The starter-controller
Yes
The starter
No
The controller
No
LUT M
Yes
LUA 1C11
LUA 1C20
LUF N20
Communication
modules
Function modules
Yes
No
LUF N11
LUF N02
LUL C033
LUL C031
LUL C15
LUL C08
LUL C09
LUL C07
3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHRXWSXWLQSXWV
LUF W10
LUF DH11
LUF DA01
LUF DA10
LUF V2
10
1/135
Characteristics
Protection
Short-circuit protection
Motor type
3-phase
Conforming to standard
When used in conjunction with an LUB 12 or LUB 32 power base, magnetic control
unit LUCL conforms to standard IEC 60947-2.
Tripping threshold
Tripping tolerance
20 %
Environment
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
CE
Conforming to standards
When used in conjunction an LUB power base, control unit LUCL conforms to
standard 60947-2.
690
kV
Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400
Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 40
Degree of protection
Front panel outside connection
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone
(protection against
Front panel and wired terminals
GLUHFWQJHUFRQWDFW
Other faces
Protective treatment
IP 20
IP 20
7+
IP 40
Cycles 12
48
Storage
- 40+ 85
Operation
Flame resistance
Conforming to UL 94
2000
650
V2
Environmental restrictions
Shock resistance
1/2 sine wave = 11 ms
Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27
(1)
Vibration resistance
5300 Hz
Resistance to
electrostatic discharge
kV
kV
On contact: 8 - Level 4
V/m
10 - Level 3
Immunity to
fast transient currents
kV
kV
Immunity to dissipated
shock waves
Common mode
Serial mode
kV
10
Uc a 24240 V,
Uc c 48220 V
Uc = 24 V c
10
Immunity to conducted
high-frequency disturbance
Not applicable
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
(2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.
1/136
Characteristics
LUB 12 + LUCL
LUB 32 + LUCL
2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
3KLOLSVQRUDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
1.92.5
2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
N.m
1.92.5
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
N.m
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
3KLOLSVQRUDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
0.81.2
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.81.2
Drop-out
Typical consumption
I max while closing
I rms sealed
Heat dissipation
Operating time
Resistance to micro-breaks
Resistance to voltage dips
Mechanical durability
Maximum operating rate
a 50/60 Hz
c
c 24 V (1)
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V
c 110240 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
Closing
Opening
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
W
ms
ms
ms
IEC/EN 61000-4-11
In millions of operating cycles
In operating cycles per hour
24240
24220
2027
2026.5
a 38.572. c 38.593
a 88264
c 88242
14.5
14.5
29
55
130
140
280
280
60
70
35
35
2
99u 72 V: 50
35
3
At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms
15
3600
24240
24220
2027
2026.5
a 38.572. c 38.593
a 88264
c 88242
14.5
14.5
29
55
220
220
280
280
80
90
45
25
3
99u 72 V: 50
35
3
3
Yes
SDGORFNZLWKPPVKDQN
12
y 70 C: 12 A
y 70 C: 12 A
3
Yes
SDGORFNZLWKPPVKDQN
32
y 70 C: 32 A
y 70 C: 32 A
690 (3)
4060
3
6
0.1 0.3
690 (3)
4060
15
3600
Possible
Padlocking
A
Conforming
to IEC/ EN
60947-2
Category AC-41
Category AC-43
V
Hz
A
W
9
0.6
12
1.1
18
2.4
25
4.6
32
7.5
V
230
440
500
600
kA
50
50
10
4
ms
2
2
2
kA2s
90
(1) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %.
(2) No consumption sealed.
(3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9SP0.
10
120
1/137
Combinations
Coordination
7KHVWDQGDUGGHQHVWHVWVDWGLIIHUHQWOHYHOVRIFXUUHQWWKHSXUSRVHRIWKHVHWHVWVLV
to place the equipment in extreme conditions.
7KHVWDQGDUGGHQHVW\SHVRIFRRUGLQDWLRQDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFRQGLWLRQRIWKH
components after testing: type 1 and type 2
Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to
resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts.
526112
Power
400 V (kW)
TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)
Class 20
5.5
ATS48D17
7.5
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATS48D17
ATS48D22
11
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATS48D22
ATS48D32
15
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATS48D32
ATS48D38
526112
TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV21H075N4
ATV21HU15N4
2.2
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV21HU22N4
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV21HU30N4
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV21HU40N4
5.5
ATV21HU55N4
7.5
ATV21HU75N4
11
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV21HD11N4
15
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV21HD15N4
526115
526112
8
+
10
1/138
Power
400 V (kW)
TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)
0.75
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV21W075N4/N4C
1.5
ATV21WU15N4/N4C
2.2
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV21WU22N4/N4C
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV21WU30N4/N4C
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV21WU40N4/N4C
5.5
ATV21WU55N4/N4C
7.5
ATV21WU75N4/N4C
11
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV21WD11N4/N4C
15
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV21WD15N4/N4C
Combinations
526116
526112
526117
526112
TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)
0.37
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV31H037N4
0.55
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV31H055N4
0.75
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV31H075N4
1.1
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV31HU11N4
1.5
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV31HU15N4
2.2
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV31HU22N4
LUB32 + LUCL18
ATV31HU30N4
LUB32 + LUCL18
ATV31HU40N4
5.5
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV31HU55N4
7.5
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV31HU75N4
526118
526112
TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)
0.75
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV61H075N4
1.5
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV61HU15N4
2.2
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV61HU22N4
LUB32 + LUCL18
ATV61HU30N4
LUB32 + LUCL18
ATV61HU40N4
5.5
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV61HU55N4
7.5
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV61HU75N4
TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)
0.75
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV71H075N4
1.5
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV71HU15N4
2.2
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV71HU22N4
LUB32 + LUCL18
ATV71HU30N4
LUB32 + LUCL18
ATV71HU40N4
5.5
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV71HU55N4
10
1/139
General
526454
3
Functions performed by integral 63
units
Power switching
526324
7
526325
Reversing pairs
Two 3-pole contactors, horizontally mounted:
b mechanically interlocked.
&DQEHWWHGZLWKWKHVDPHSURWHFWLRQPRGXOHVDVLQWHJUDOFRQWDFWRUEUHDNHU
10
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
1/140
Dimensions, schemes:
pages 1/174 to 1/177
General (continued)
Isolation
Isolation conforming to IEC 60947
integral 63 contactor breakers provide isolation and padlocking functions conforming
to standards IEC 60947.
,QDGGLWLRQLQWHJUDO/'FRQWDFWRUEUHDNHUVDQG/'UHYHUVLQJFRQWDFWRU
EUHDNHUVLQFRUSRUDWHVSHFLFSROHVIRUFRQWUROWHVWLQJDQGSDGORFNLQJ
Overload protection
534529
Short-circuit protection
526327
526328
6LPSOH[LQJDQGFDEOLQJPHWKRGV
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
LQWHJUDOFRQWUDFWRUEUHDNHUVDQGUHYHUVLQJFRQWDFWRUEUHDNHUVWRQWRPP7
rails using a separate mounting plate.
integral units can also be mounted on:
b panels,
b pre-slotted mounting plates type AM1 P,
b 2 x 35 mm 7 rails using sliding clip nuts,
b CMD prefabricated plug-in busbar trunking (providing an economical assembly,
combining safety and simplicity of use),
b AK5 panel busbar systems.
Dimensions, schemes:
pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/141
10
Terminology
Terminology
Altitude
7KHUDUHHGDWPRVSKHUHDWKLJKDOWLWXGHUHGXFHVWKHGLHOHFWULFVWUHQJWKRIWKHDLUDQG
hence the rated operational voltage of the contactor breaker. It also reduces the
cooling effect of the air and hence the rated operational current of the contactor
breaker (unless the temperature drops at the same time).
Altitude
Rated operational voltage
Rated operational current
3500 m
0.90
0.92
4000 m
0.80
0.90
4500 m
0.70
0.88
5000 m
0.60
0.86
The current which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a short time, after a
period of no load, without dangerous overheating.
This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current,
determines the use of the contactor breaker or starter, and on which the
corresponding tests and the utilisation category are based. For 3-phase circuits, it is
expressed as the voltage between phases.
Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational
voltage Ue is less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui.
The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics
are based. For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form
(less than 5% total harmonic distortion).
Note: WKHVHGHQLWLRQVDUHEDVHGRQH[WUDFWVIURPVWDQGDUG,(&
(1) Conventional free air thermal current, conforming to IEC standards.
10
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
1/142
Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177
Terminology (continued)
Terminology (continued)
7KLVLVWKHUDWLREHWZHHQWKHWLPHWKHFXUUHQWRZVWDQGWKHGXUDWLRQRIWKHF\FOH7
t
m = --T
T
&\FOHGXUDWLRQGXUDWLRQRIFXUUHQWRZWLPHDW]HURFXUUHQW
Pole impedance
The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components
between the input terminal and the output terminal.
Electrical durability
This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts
can perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation
category, the rated operational current and the rated operational voltage.
Mechanical durability
7KLVLVWKHDYHUDJHQXPEHURIQRORDGRSHUDWLQJF\FOHVLHZLWK]HURFXUUHQWRZ
through the main poles) which the contactor breaker can perform without mechanical
failure.
Coordination
The coordination of protection devices involves combining, in a selective way, a
short-circuit protection device (fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers) with a contactor
and an overload protection device. Its objective is to break any abnormal current, in
plenty of time, without any danger to personnel, whilst providing adequate protection
of the equipment against an overload or short-circuit current.
Type 1 - IEC 60947-4-1
In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to
personnel or installations and may not be able to resume operation without repair or
the replacement of parts.
Type 2 - IEC 60947-4-1
In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to
personnel or installations and must be able to resume operation. The risk of contact
welding is permissible if they can be easily separated.
Total, ensuring reliability of operation - IEC 60947-6-2
In the event of a short-circuit, no damage or risk of welding is permissible on the
equipment constituting the motor starter. Operation can be resumed without any
maintenance.
Note: WKHVHGHQLWLRQVDUHEDVHGRQH[WUDFWVIURPVWDQGDUG,(&
(1) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of
the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum
asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak
asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component.
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/143
10
Terminology (continued)
'HQLWLRQ
1
Reminder of standards IEC 60947
2
Standards for contactor breakers
7KHVWDQGDUGXWLOLVDWLRQFDWHJRULHVGHQHWKHFXUUHQWYDOXHVZKLFKWKHFRQWDFWRU
breaker must be able to make or break. These values depend on:
b the type of load being switched: squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors,
b the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting
or running, reversing, plugging.
b IEC 60947-1: general rules,
b IEC 60947-2: circuit breakers,
b IEC 60947-3: isolating devices,
b IEC 60947-4-1: contactors and motor starters,
b IEC 60947-5-1: control and signalling units,
b IEC 60947-6-2: control and protection devices,
IEC 60947-4-1
Standard IEC 60947-4-1: covers contactors and electromechanical motor starters. It
concerns:
b types of equipment with main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose
rated operational voltage does not exceed 1000 V for a.c. applications or 1500 V for
d.c. applications,
b contactors used in conjunction with overload and/or short-circuit protection
devices,
b motor starters used in conjunction with separate short-circuit protection devices
and/or with separate short-circuit protection devices and built-in overload protection
devices,
b contactors and combination motor starters which incorporate their own shortcircuit protection device.
IEC 60947-6-2
Standard IEC 60947-6: covers multi-function equipment.
It concerns connection, power switching and protection devices (or equipment) with
main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose rated operational voltage is
less than or equal to 1000 V for a.c. applications, or 1500 V for d.c. applications.
Such devices are designed to perform both the power switching function and the
SURWHFWLRQRIUHPRWHO\FRQWUROOHGFLUFXLWVIXQFWLRQWKH\FDQDOVRSHUIRUPRWKHU
functions, such as isolation.
After short-circuit (Isc) tests, the products must be able to make and break the
FXUUHQWVFRUUHVSRQGLQJWRWKHVSHFLHGXWLOLVDWLRQFDWHJRULHVDQGWRWKH
QXPEHURIRSHUDWLQJF\FOHVVSHFLHGLQWKHVWDQGDUGZLWKRXWIDLOLQJ7KLV
series of tests is completed by temperature rise tests.
6WDQGDUG,(&VSHFLHVWKDWLQWKHHYHQWRIDVKRUWFLUFXLWQRGDPDJH
or risk of contact welding is permissible on the devices constituting the motor
starter.
The integral contactor breaker, through its design, ensures reliability of
operation. After eliminating the fault, operation can be resumed instantly
without any maintenance work on the product, other than resetting.
Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-1
This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or
greater than 0.95 (cos M y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution.
Category AC-2
This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5
times the rated current of the motor.
b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to
the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-3
This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running.
b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7
times the rated current of the motor.
b 2QRSHQLQJLWEUHDNVWKHUDWHGFXUUHQWGUDZQE\WKHPRWRUDWWKLVSRLQWWKH
voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage.
Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors (lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).
10
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
1/144
Dimensions, schemes:
pages 1/174 to 1/177
Terminology (continued)
(continued)
This category covers starting, plug braking and inching of squirrel cage motors.
On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5
to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a
voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as
the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy
industry.
Category AC-41
This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or
greater than 0.95 (cos M y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5
times the rated current of the motor.
b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal
to the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-43
7KLVFDWHJRU\DSSOLHVWRVTXLUUHOFDJHPRWRUVZLWKEUHDNLQJZKLOHPRWRUUXQQLQJ
inching or occasional reversing of limited duration are permissible if the number of
operating cycles does not exceed 5 per minute, or 10 within a 10 minute period.
b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7
times the rated current of the motor.
b 2QRSHQLQJLWEUHDNVWKHUDWHGFXUUHQWGUDZQE\WKHPRWRUDWWKLVSRLQWWKH
voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage.
Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).
Category AC-44
This category covers applications with plug braking and inching of squirrel cage or
slip ring motors.
On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5
to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a
voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as
the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy
industry.
10 A
210 s
10
410 s
20
620 s
30
930 s
IEC 60947-5
Standard IEC 60947-5-1: covers switching devices and components for control
circuits.
It concerns electromechanical devices for control circuits.
Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-14 (2)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn
with the electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA.
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn
with the electromagnet closed is greater than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time
taken to reach 95 % of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the
power P drawn by the load (with P y 50 W).
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactor breakers.
(1) Ir = protection module setting current.
(2) Replaces category AC-11.
(3) Replaces category DC-11.
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
10
Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/145
Equipment selection
for starters
When designing an installation, it is essential to take into account precise criteria for
determining the conductor c.s.a. and selecting equipment.
In particular:
b permissible currents for the conductors,
b maximum voltage drops,
b short-circuit protection,
b protection against indirect contact.
The latter three criteria must be taken into account when selecting the integral unit.
The principle behind the rules described below is, on the whole, common to all
European publications. However, the calculations and values concerning protection
against indirect contact are based on French standard NF C 15-100, and it is up to
the user to check the regulations in force in the country concerned.
Short-circuit protection
Breaking capacity rule
Check that the breaking capacity (BC) of the integral unit is equal to or greater than
the prospective short-circuit current (Isc max) at the point where it is to be installed.
BC u Isc max
These 2 checks need only be made when modules with a low rating are used.
Example: for a 6.3/10 A module, a cable c.s.a. u 2.5 mm2 is required to withstand
Isc max = 50 kA.
PEN
B'
C'
TNC scheme
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/146
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177
Equipment selection
for starters
Uo
Id = c.q.___
Zb
L
Lc
R = U __ = 2 U ___
S
S
v The contact voltage (UL) for a dead short is at most equal to the value determined
by the safety curve for the operating time tm of the integral unit in its magnetic tripping
zone.
7KLVFRQGLWLRQLVJHQHUDOO\IXOOOHGIRUSRZHUVXSSOLHVRI9
(In fact, for UL = 50 V, a tm y 500 ms would be required and for UL = 25 V,
a tm y 110 ms would be required).
7KHUVWFRQGLWLRQDOORZVXVWRFDOFXODWHWKHPD[LPXPOHQJWKRIWKHFLUFXLWWRSURYLGH
protection against indirect contact in the TN scheme.
For the TN scheme:
c.q.Uo.Sph
__________
Ly
2U.1. Irth
0.8 x Uo x Sph
i.e. L max = _______________________
2 x 0.0225 x 1.2 Irth max
10
16
25
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Irth max.
A
10
16
10
16
25
32
16
25
32
40
25
32
40
50
32
40
50
63
32
40
50
63
32
40
50
63
=3
m
180
112
298
186
118
92
296
190
148
118
284
222
178
142
370
296
236
188
590
472
378
300
922
738
590
468
=6
m
90
56
149
93
59
46
148
95
74
59
142
111
89
71
185
148
118
94
295
236
189
150
461
369
295
234
= 12
m
45
28
75
47
32
23
74
48
37
30
71
56
45
36
93
74
59
47
148
118
95
75
281
185
148
117
= 15
m
36
22
60
37
60
10
Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/147
Selection according to
utilisation category and
required electrical
durability
220/240
400/415
440
480/525
600/690
63
63
63
63
63
33
37
55
kW
15
33
Electrical durability
Control and protection of motors at Ue y 415 V
10
8
6
5
4
(63 A)
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
1
1,5
2 3 45 79
20
6 8 10
40 60 80 150 200
63 100160 300
Current broken in A
7
Current
breaking
limit
AC-3
AC-43
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/148
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177
AC-2
AC-42
Selection according to
utilisation category and
required electrical
durability
T y 40 C
63
T y 55 C
55
T y 70 C
50
integral 63
Operating cycles/h
On-load
factor 85 %
Operation
at Ie max
1200
Operation
at 0.5 Ie
2400
On-load
factor 25 %
Operation
at Ie max
1800
10
8
6
5
4
(63 A)
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
20
40
63 80 100
60
Current broken in A
Note: IRUXVHLQFDWHJRU\$&SOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/149
Characteristics
Type
integral 63
Number of poles
Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
In AC-3 at 400 V
Electrical durability
Mechanical durability at Uc
a
Maximum operating rate
at ambient temperature y 55 C c with converter
A
V
Environment
Conforming to standards
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature
around the device
Vibration resistance
Permissible acceleration
Operation
Storage
c Operation
(1) Storage
5100 Hz
C
C
C
C
Shock resistance
Permissible acceleration
Impulse duration: 11 ms
Degree of protection
Flame resistance
Without derating
In relation to normal
vertical mounting plane
3
63
690
1.2 million operating cycles
5 million operating cycles
3600 operating cycles/hour
600 operating cycles/hour
Voltage limits
at T y 55 C
Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc
Heat dissipation
Operating time (2)
at 20 C and at Uc
a 50 Hz
a 60 Hz
c with converter
Operation
Drop-out
a
Inrush
Sealed
c (1)
Inrush
Sealed
a 50/60 Hz
c with
converter
&
2
&
2
V
V
V
VA
VA
W
W
W
ms
ms
ms
ms
24660
24600
24, 48, 110
0.851.1 Uc
0.250.7 Uc
375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz)
25 (50 Hz or 60 Hz)
300 for 50 ms
8
8 (50 Hz), 11 (60 Hz)
1235
720
2540
1525
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/150
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/1711/1741/174
Characteristics
Type
integral 63
Pole characteristics
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
Frequency limits
of the operational current
Rated impulse
withstand voltage (Uimp)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Heat dissipation in the power
circuits of the contactor breaker
and its protection module
Rated making capacity
I rms
I peak
Rated breaking capacity
conforming to
IEC 60947-2
conforming to IEC
60947-6-2 ensuring
reliability of operation
Total breaking time
Electrical durability in AC-3
at Ie max and at 415 V
after 1 cycle O-CO-r-CO at Isc
Thermal limit
T y 40 C
A
Hz
63
4060
690
25
4.4
Operational voltage
Value of cosM
Cycle P1 (O-t-CO) Icu (1)
Cycle P2 (O-t CO-t-CO) Ics (1)
Icu = Ics
Prospective rms
short-circuit current at
terminals of a new device
Millions of operating cycles
With Isc max.
at 415 V, 50 Hz
Tightening torque
40
5.8
50
7
63
9
220/240
0.25
kA rms 50
kA rms 50
kA rms 50
380/415
0.25
50
50
50
440
0.25
50
50
50
480/525
0.25
35
35
30
600/690
0.5
10
10
10
ms
kA
4
3
10
25
35
50
1
300 x 103
0.9
0.6
0.5
0.2
A2s
mm2
Maximum c.s.a.
1 x 50 or 2 x 35
Minimum c.s.a.
1x6
mm2
2 x 25
1x6
mm2
N.m
1 x 50
6
1x6
Cabling
Flexible cable
without cable end
Flexible cable
with cable end
Solid cable
32
5
Thermal protection
Magnetic protection
conforming to
IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2
Conforming to standards
Number of poles
Number of protected poles
Rated operational voltage
Max. continuous current
Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.)
Temperature compensation
Protection against
phase imbalance
Tripping class
Instantaneous trip current
setting range
V
A
A
C
LB1 LD03P
Standard motors
NF C 63-650
3
3
690
1363
10/1345/63
- 20+ 60
With
LB1 LD03M
Standard motors
NF C 63-650
3
3
690
1363
10/1345/63
20+ 60
With
LB6 LD03M
Frequent starting
NF C 63-650
3
3
690
1363
20+ 60
Without
20
20
Fixed at 15 Irth max 612 Irth max (usual 612 Irth max
setting
910 Irth maxi)
20 %
20 %
20 %
Tripping tolerance
LB1 LD03L
Distribution circuits
NF C 63-120
3
3
690
1363
10/1345/63
20+ 60
Without
V
Operating cycles
20 %
IEC 60947
690
10 000
%\RUSDGORFNVPPVKDQN
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Operating cycles
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
36 Irth max
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
1/151
10
Characteristics (continued)
Making capacity
Rated
c category
operational
DC-13 (2)
power
Making capacity
Cabling
A
V
6
690
mVA
V
VA
VA
VA
V
W
W
W
mm2
600
48
110/127
300
500
160
300
1500
3500
24
48
120
90
70
50
800
700
Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5
Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
A
V
V
6
690
125
mm2
A
V
3
250
V
VA
VA
VA
VA
V
W
W
W
W
mm2
24
48
100
100
50
50
75
75
75
75
Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5
Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
220/240
600
330
6000
110
75
38
400
380/415
520
300
7500
220
68
33
260
110/127
600
90
875
160
110/125
50
6
50
6
220
750
125
500
200
200
50
7.5
50
7.5
440
500
280
7000
440
61
28
220
a.c. supply
d.c. supply
5
c
Conforming to
IEC 60947-5-1
With U u 17 V and I u 10 mA
Voltage
1 million operating cycles
1.5 million operating cycles
a category AC-15
Voltage
1 million operating cycles
1.5 million operating cycles
c category DC-13
Conforming to
IEC 60947-5-1
Voltage
Resistive load
Lamp load (3)
Inductive load (4)
Motor (5)
Voltage
Resistive load
Lamp load (3)
Inductive load (4)
Motor (5)
Cabling
(1) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current
(cos M 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos M 0.4).
(2) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, the time
constant increasing with the load.
(3) Lamp load: peak current = 10 times the rated current.
(4) Inductive load: cos M 0.4 for a.c. operation; time constant 7 ms for d.c. operation.
(5) Motor: peak current = 6 times the rated current.
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/152
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Characteristics
Type
Ambient air temperature
around the device
Storage
Operation
Isolation
Cabling
Min.
Max.
Operating limits
Protection
C
C
kV
mm2
mm2
Interface modules
Converters
- 25+ 70
- 25+ 50
rms voltage between inputs and outputs: 2.5
1x1
2 x 2.5
0.85...10.1 Uc
Against reverse polarity (by diode)
and against overvoltage
- 25+ 70
- 25+ 50
Common negative terminal
1x1
2 x 2.5
0.8...1.1 Uc (2)
Against reverse polarity (by diode)
and against overvoltage
LA1 LC
580BD
LA1 LC
080BD
580ED
180BD
080ED
2
080FD
+ E1
E2
Indication of input state
Input signals
Voltage
(logic side)
Current
State 0
guaranteed
State 1
guaranteed
Supply voltage
For U
For I
For U
LA1 Lp080BD
LA1 Lp080ED
LA1 Lp180BD
A1
+ E1
E2
A2
E1
+
A2
mA
V
mA
V
< 2.4
<2
> 20.4
a
a
a
a
a
a
c
24240 24240 24240 24240 24240 24240 24 (2)
(A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (E1-E2)
< 4.8
<2
> 40.8
c 524
(E1-E2)
1524 V
8.55 V
< 2.5
<2
>4
c 48
(E1-E2)
25
< 2.4
<2
> 20.4
< 4.8
<2
>4
c 524
(E1-E2)
1524 V
8.55 V
< 2.5
<2
>4
E1
A1
E3
A2
E2
By LED
c 24
c 48
(E1-E2) (E1-E2)
30
20
c 24
(E1-E2)
50
(0V)
LA1 Lp080FD
A1
(0V)
A2
E2
c 24 (1) c 48 (1)
(E3-E2) (E3-E2)
20
10
c 24 (1) c 48 (1)
(E3-E2) (E3-E2)
20
10
<7
<5
> 14
< 14
< 2.5
> 28
<7
<5
> 14
<14
< 2.5
> 28
c
48 (2)
(E1-E2)
c
110 (2)
(E1-E2)
c
24 (2)
(E1-E2)
c
48 (2)
(E1-E2)
c
110 (2)
(E1-E2)
250
4
30
15
250
4
30
15
300
8
35
20
300
8
35
20
300
8
35
20
Operating characteristics
Electrical durability
in millions of operating cycles
Average
Inrush 50 Hz
consumption
60 Hz
c
VA
VA
W
Sealed 50/60 Hz VA
c
W
Operating time Pull-in
ms
at 20 C
Drop-out
ms
and at Uc
160
185
12
1530
2235
1
160
185
12
1530
2235
160
185
12
1035
830
375
450
25
2040
2545
375
450
25
2040
2545
375
450
25
1045
830
250
4
30
15
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
1/153
Characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards
Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature
around the device
Storage
Operation
Permissible for
operation at Uc
C
C
C
Protection against
GLUHFWQJHUFRQWDFW
Tripping devices
Type
Pull-in voltage
Drop-out voltage
Average consumption
Uc
Uc
Inrush
Sealed
VA
VA
ms
VA
s
s
LA1 LC052p
9
9
0.5
LA1 LC071p
0.71.1
8
4
10
Reset devices
Type
Consumption
Duration of a reset cycle
Minimum pulse duration
IEC 60337-1
7+
- 40+ 80
- 25+ 55
- 25+ 70
RC (resistor-capacitor)
Operational voltage
y 250
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/154
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Characteristics
Breaking capacity
Protection module
Reference
Irth
min
A
LBp LD03p16
10
Operational voltage
220/240 V 400/415 V 440 V
500 V
600/690 V
max
A
13
kA
kA
kA
kA
u130
u130
u130
u130
kA
10
LBp LD03p21
13
18
u130
u130
u130
u130
10
LBp LD03p22
18
25
u130
u130
50
35
10
LBp LD03p53
23
32
u130
50
50
35
10
LBp LD03p55
28
40
u130
50
50
30
10
LBp LD03p57
35
50
u130
50
50
30
10
LBp LD03p61
45
63
u130
50
50
30
10
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
1/155
Selection of protection
module according to the
tripping characteristics
300
min
10 13 18
100
min
23 28 35 45 63
25 32 40 50 irth
P16
P21
P22
P53
P55
P57
P61
2
10
min
40 s
1 min
3
10 s
1s
195
375
270
600
945
480 750
0,1 s
0,01 s
10
15 20
30 40 54 60
100
200
400
600
1000
2000
Current in A
300
min
10 13 18
Thermal zone
100
min
23 28 35 45 63
25 32 40 50 irth
M16
M21
M22
M53
M55
M57
M61
10
min
1 min
10 s
Magnetic zone
8
1s
78
156
480
240
108 190
600
300
150 216
380
760
0,1 s
9
0,01 s
6
10
20
40
60
100
200
400
600
1000
2000
Current in A
(1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in the above curves are for an
DPELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUHRI&ZLWKRXWSULRUFXUUHQWRZFROGVWDWH7KHDYHUDJH
RSHUDWLQJWLPHVDIWHUSURORQJHGFXUUHQWRZKRWVWDWHFDQEHFDOFXODWHGE\DSSO\LQJWKH
FRHIFLHQW
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/156
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Selection of protection
module according to the
tripping characteristics
Time
300
min
100
min
Thermal zone
10
min
1 min
Magnetic zone
10 s
1s
78
156
480
240
108 190
150 216
600
300
760
380
0,1 s
0,01 s
6
10
20
40
60 80 100 110
200
400
600
1000
2000
Current in A
300
min
25 32 40 50
18 23 28 35 45 63 irth
100
min
L22
L53
L55
L57
10
min
L61
1 min
10 s
8
1s
75
95
0,1 s
150
190
120
240
150
300
190
380
9
0,01 s
6
10
20
40
60
100
200
400
600
1000
2000
Current in A
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
1/157
Selection of protection
module according to the
tripping characteristics
100
80
60
40
20
=
10
8
6
=
4
3
0,2
0,3
0,5
1 (1)
0,7
co
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,1
0,2
0,4 0,3
4 6 8 10 15 20
50
100 200
Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
1000
800
600
400
200
(1)
100
80
60
40
20
10
1
8 10
15 20
50
100
200
Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/158
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Selection of protection
module according to the
tripping characteristics
100
80
60
40
=
20
=
10
8
6
0,2
0,3
0,5
1 (1)
0,7
4
3
co
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,1
0,2
0,4 0,3
6 8 10 15 20
35 50
100
200
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
1000
800
600
400
(1)
200
100
80
60
40
20
10
1
8 10
15 20
35 50
100
200
Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
1/159
References
Operational Breaking
Basic reference (3)
current
capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
for
the control circuit voltage code (2)
Ue y 415 V
A
kA
63
50
Weight
kg
LD1 LD030p
3.700
Operational Breaking
Basic reference (3)
current
capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
for
the control circuit voltage code (2)
Ue y 415 V
A
kA
63
50
kg
Weight
LD4 LD130p
3.800
LD4 LD030p
3.800
Operational Breaking
Basic reference (3)
current
capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
for
the control circuit voltage code (2)
Ue y 415 V
A
kA
63
50
kg
7
LD5 LC030p
Weight
LD5 LD130p
7.600
LD5 LD030p
7.600
)RUWKHXQLWWRIXQFWLRQLWPXVWEHWWHGZLWKDSURWHFWLRQPRGXOHWREHRUGHUHGVHSDUDWHO\VHHSDJHRSSRVLWH
6WDQGDUGFRQWUROFLUFXLWYROWDJHVIRURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
Volts 24
36
42
48
110
120
220
230
240
380
415
440
480
500
400
50 Hz B
D
E
F
M
M
U
Q
N
N
600
660
60 Hz
BC
CC
CE
FC
LC
MC
MC
UX
c (4)
BD
ED
FD
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/160
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155
References
LB1 LD03Mpp
600 V
690 V
kW
10
A
1013
LB1 LD03P16
kg
0.780
11
15
1318
LB1 LD03P21
0.780
5.5
11
11
15
18.5
1825
LB1 LD03P22
0.780
7.5
15
15
18.5
22
2332
LB1 LD03P53
0.780
22
22
25
33
2840
LB1 LD03P55
0.780
11
25
25
33
45
3550
LB1 LD03P57
0.780
15
33
33
40
55
4563
LB1 LD03P61
0.780
Thermal
Magnetic
setting range
protection
(Irth min to Irth max)
Reference
Weight
600 V
690 V
kW
10
A
1013
A
78156
LB1 LD03M16
kg
0.780
11
15
1318
108216
LB1 LD03M21
0.780
5.5
11
11
15
18.5
1825
150300
LB1 LD03M22
0.780
7.5
22
22
25
33
2332
190380
LB1 LD03M53
0.780
22
22
25
33
2840
240480
LB1 LD03M55
0.780
11
25
25
33
45
3550
300600
LB1 LD03M57
0.780
15
33
33
40
55
4563
380760
LB1 LD03M61
0.780
Thermal
Magnetic
setting range
protection
(Irth min to Irth max)
Reference
Weight
LB6 LD03Mpp
600 V
690 V
kW
10
A
78156
LB6 LD03M16
kg
0.780
11
15
108216
LB6 LD03M21
0.780
5.5
11
11
15
18.5
150300
LB6 LD03M22
0.780
7.5
22
22
25
33
190380
LB6 LD03M53
0.780
22
22
25
33
240480
LB6 LD03M55
0.780
11
25
25
33
45
300600
LB6 LD03M57
0.780
15
33
33
40
55
380760
LB6 LD03M61
0.780
Magnetic protection
Reference
Weight
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155
1/161
Selection
Neutral
connection
Type of
circuit
TNC
(neutral and
PE combined)
Equipment
scheme
3-pole + PEN
Combination
contactor breaker + protection module
LD1 LD030p + LB1 LD03Lpp
LD4 LD130p + LB1 LD03Lpp
LD4 LD030p + LB1 LD03Lpp
PEN
Equipment scheme
TNS
3-pole
(neutral and
PE separated)
Combination
contactor breaker + protection module
LD1 LC030p + LB1 LC03Lpp
LD4 LC130p + LB1 LC03Lpp
LD4 LC030p + LB1 LC03Lpp
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/162
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155
References
Maximum
operational
current AC-1
T y 40 C
A
Maximum Breaking
Number
operational capacity (Iq) of poles
voltage
for
Ue y 415 V
V
kA
Basic reference.
To be completed by adding
the control voltage code (2)
63
690
LD1 LC030p
50
Weight
kg
3.700
LD1 LD030p
Rated
Maximum
Maximum
thermal
operational
operational
current I th
current AC-1 voltage
T y 40 C
T y 40 C
A
A
V
Black knob (CNOMO. VDE 0113)
63
63
690
Breaking
Number
capacity (Iq) of poles
for
Ue y 415 V
kA
Basic reference.
To be completed by adding
the control voltage code (2)
50
LD4 LD130p
3.800
3.800
Weight
kg
Magnetic
setting range
(36 Irth max)
A
3978
Number
of poles
Number of
protected
poles
Reference
LB1 LD03L16
kg
0.780
1318
54108
LB1 LD03L21
0.780
1825
75150
LB1 LD03L22
0.780
2332
95190
LB1 LD03L53
0.780
2840
120240
LB1 LD03L55
0.780
3550
150300
LB1 LD03L57
0.780
4563
190380
LB1 LD03L61
0.780
Weight
LB1 LD03Lpp
)RUWKHXQLWWRIXQFWLRQLWPXVWEHWWHGZLWKDSURWHFWLRQPRGXOHWREHRUGHUHGVHSDUDWHO\
6WDQGDUGFRQWUROFLUFXLWYROWDJHVIRURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
Volts 24
36
42
48
110
120
220
230
240
380
415
440
400
50 Hz B
D
E
F
M
M
U
Q
N
N
CC
CE
K
FC
LC
MC
MC
UX
60 Hz BC
c (3)
BD
ED
FD
(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.
480
500
600
660
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155
1/163
2
AUTO
+
TRIP.
O
O
T
RESE
5
AUTO
+
TRIP.
T
RESE
9
AUTO
TRIP.
O
O
T
RESE
10
1/164
References
Composition
Reference
Weight
kg
LA1 LC010
2
2
1
1
1
LD4
Mounted
on LH side
LD5
Mounted
on LH side
2
LA1 LC012
0.280
0.220
3
LA1 LC025
0.170
LA1 LC020
0.100
LA1 LC030
0.035
LA1 LB021
0.100
LA1 LC031
0.100
Composition
Reference
LA1 LC001
Weight
kg
0.035
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155
1/165
2
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
10
1/166
References
Basic reference.
To be completed by adding
the control voltage code (1)
LA1 LC070p
Instantaneous
LA1 LC072p
0.150
or 1 shunt trip
Instantaneous
LA1 LC071p
0.150
1 remote electrical
reset device
24 V 50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052B
0.320
42 V 50 Hz
48 V 50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052E
0.320
100/127 V
50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052F
0.320
200/240 V
50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052M
0.320
LD1, LD4
or LD5
WWHGZLWKDQ
LA1 LC010 or
LA1 LC012
block
1 undervoltage trip
LD1, LD4
or LD5
WWHGZLWKDQ
LA1 LC010 or
LA1 LC012
add-on block
Weight
kg
0.150
6WDQGDUGFRQWUROFLUFXLWYROWDJHVIRURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
Volts
50 Hz
60 Hz
24
B
B
48
E
E
110
F
F
120
220/230
M
M
240
U
M
380/400
Q
Q
415
N
440
N
N
10
General :
pages 1/174 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155
1/167
2
AUTO
+
TRIP.
O
O
T
RESE
7
AUTO
+
TRIP.
RESE
8
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
10
1/168
References
Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Accessories and spare parts
On top of the
integral unit
Type
Operational
voltage
50/60 Hz
V
24240
Reference
Solid state
Control
voltage
c
V
524
LA1 LD180BD
kg
0.110
Relay output
24
24240
LA1 LD580BD
0.110
48
24240
LA1 LD580ED
0.110
Weight
On top of the
integral unit
For use
on integral
LDp LDpppBD
LDp LDpppED
LDp LDpppFD
Operational
voltage
c (2)
V
24 (4)
48 (4)
110
Consumption
Inrush
Sealed
W
300
300
300
W
8
Weight
Coil
LX1 LD0249
kg
0.300
Converter
LA1 LD080BD
0.150
Coil
LX1 LD0489
0.300
Converter
LA1 LD080ED
0.150
Coil
LX1 LD01109
0.300
Converter
LA1 LD080FD
0.150
Suppressor module
Mounting
Clip-on
Type
Operational voltage
50/60 Hz
V
y 250
Reference
LA9 D09982
Weight
kg
0.010
(1) For reversing contactor breakers, order 2 interface modules or 2 voltage converters.
:KHQXVHGRQUHFWLHGVLQJOHSKDVHRUSKDVHVXSSO\WKHSHDNWRSHDNULSSOHYROWDJHPXVWEHHTXDOWRRUOHVVWKDQRI
the average voltage.
Operating limits 0.8 to 1.1 Uc for an ambient temperature y 40 C.
,WLVHVVHQWLDOWKDWWKHYROWDJHFRQYHUWHUEHDVVRFLDWHGZLWKWKHVSHFLFFRLOLQGLFDWHG
(4) 24 V and 48 V converters can be operated by Low level input. In this case, the control circuit voltage must be the same as the
supply voltage (24 or 48 V).
(5) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc
max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155
1/169
References
Protection accessories
Description
Power terminal
protection shroud
Sealing cover
For
use on
Upstream power
terminals (L1, L2, L3)
Protection module
Sold in
lots of
5
Unit
reference
LA9 LD701
Weight
kg
0.050
LA1 LC090
0.010
Mounting
on
1 x 75 mm
7 rail or
2 x 32 mm
4 rails
Reference
LA9 LD010
Weight
kg
0.450
Colour
of knob
Red
Unit
reference
LA9 LC330
Weight
kg
0.400
Black
LA9 LC331
0.400
Red
LA9 LC530
0.400
Black
LA9 LC531
0.400
Mounting accessories
Description
LA1 LC090
Mounting plate
For
use on
LD1, LD4, LD5
Adjustable
from 0 to 185 mm
with extension
(control knob mounted
on plate or door)
For
use on
LD1
LD4, LD5
LA9 LD010
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/170
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155
References
a.c. operation
LX1 LDppp
Rated control
circuit voltages
Uc 50 Hz Uc 60 Hz
V
V
24
Average
Inductance Voltage
resistance at of closed
code (1)
20 C 10 % circuit
:
0.213
H
0.045
BC
LX1 LD020
kg
0.300
24
0.323
0.071
LX1 LD024
0.300
36
0.503
0.106
CC
LX1 LD030
0.300
48
0.845
0.19
CE
LX1 LD040
0.300
42
0.987
0.22
LX1 LD042
0.300
48
1.26
0.29
LX1 LD048
0.300
110
4.88
LX1 LD090
0.300
115/120
5.89
1.18
FC
LX1 LD100
0.300
110
6.48
1.48
LX1 LD110
0.300
127
9.80
2.13
LX1 LD127
0.300
220
19.82
4.2
LC
LX1 LD180
0.300
230/240
23.24
4.5
MC
LX1 LD190
0.300
220/230
30.51
6.7
LX1 LD220
0.300
240
37.66
7.9
LX1 LD240
0.300
440
80.46
16.7
UX
LX1 LD360
0.300
380/400
460/480
93.63
20
LX1 LD380
0.300
415/440
116.46
23.7
LX1 LD415
0.300
500
575/600
152.18
31
LX1 LD500
0.300
660
290.80
60
LX1 LD660
0.300
Reference
Weight
d.c. operation
7KHLQWHJUDOFDQRSHUDWHRQDGFVXSSO\ZKHQWWHGZLWKDVSHFLDOFRLODQGFRUUHVSRQGLQJ
voltage converter: see page 1/169
(1) Coil voltage reference code, used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral
unit.
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155
1/171
Operation
A1
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
A2
5/L3
1/L1
LD4
A2
A1
LD1
3/L2
+0
U
Auxiliary contacts
LA1
LC020
LA1
LC030
41
13
23
31
(53)
63
42
14
24
32
(54)
64
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
42
14 24 32
54
98
96 98
96
95
13 23 31
13
23
31
14
24
32
98
98
95
08
08
05
13 23 31
13
23
31
14
24
32
96 98
96
98
95
06 08
06
08
05
16 18
16
18
15
LA1
LC001
14
24
32
95
ou
Contact closed
LD1
LA1 LC025
13 23 31
13
23
31
Contact open
LA1 LC012
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
LA1 LC010
LD4
Off
4
On, contactor open
AUTO
AUTO
5
On, contactor closed
AUTO
AUTO
6
Off after overload
TRIP.
TRIP.
Tripped on overload
TRIP.
TRIP.
Tripped on short-circuit
TRIP.
TRIP.
TRIP.
Manual reset
TRIP.
10
RESET
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/172
TRIP.
95
RESET
Characteristics :
pages 1/146 to 1/155
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Dimensions :
pages 1/174 and 1/175
Operation
5/L3
1/L1
LD5
3/L2
+0
ou
A1
A2
A2
A1
Auto
Auxiliary contacts
41
13
23
31
53
63
14
24
32
54
64
LA1
LC031
42
LA1
LC021
13
23
31
98
LA1
LC001
14
24
32
96
13
23
31
98
08
13
23
31
96
98
06
08
16
18
13
23
31
LA1
LC020
LA1 LC025
95
95
95
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
14
24
32
05
16 18
14
24
32
95
ou
05
Contact closed
LA1 LC012
15
Contact open
14
24
32
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
LA1 LC010
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
Off
On, closed
AUTO
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
On, closed
AUTO
Tripped on overload
TRIP. +
Tripped on short-circuit
TRIP. +
Manual reset
TRIP. +
RESET
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
14 24 32
15
Characteristics :
pages 1/146 to 1/155
References :
pages1/160 to 1/171
95
Dimensions :
pages 1/174 and 1/175
1/173
10
Dimensions,
mounting
100,5
90
192
45
210
250
146
158,5
192
= 28 =
16,5
121,5
100,5
= 28 =
16,5
146
158,5
104,5
128,5
45
210
243
121,5
97,5
121,5
LA1 LD080
=
90
Current limiter
LA9 LB920
45
59
194
63
181
146
51
53,5
16,5
45
148
160,5
100,5
121,5
210
275
153,5
129,5
103
115
0
59
Add-on blocks
For mounting on contactor breakers integral 63
LA1 LC012
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC052
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC07p
LA1 LC020
LA1 LC030
(1 ou 2)
LA1 LC025
LA LC001
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC070
LA1 LC071
LA1 LC072
LA1 LC012
13
11
LA1 LC025
51
26
12
12
11
LA1 LC031
LA1 LC012
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC052p
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC07pp
LA1 LC020
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC031
LA1 LC021
LA1 LC021
LA1 LC025
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC012
9
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC070
LA1 LC071
LA1 LC072
10
13
12
26
13
11
11
General:
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/174
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Schemes:
pages 1/176 and 1/177
26
51
12
Mounting (continued)
Mounting
On 32 mm 4 rails, at 220 mm centres
[0
G
75
33
DZ5 ME9
210
210
220
128,5
LA9 LD010
210
266
137,5
15
AF1 EA5
LD1
266
137,5
192
28
LD1
192
28
LD1
192
28
LD4
266
137,5
192
28
LD4
192
28
LD4
192
28
LD5
282
153,5
194
63
LD5
194
63
LD5
194
63
68
120
110
DZ5 ME5
31
192
78
LD4
192
78
LD5
194
94
5
Minimum electrical
clearance
30
4 (1)
1
(2)
==
46
(3)
a1
a2
a1
a2
LD1 LD030
90
LD4 LDp30
90
LD5 LDp30
181
LA1 LC010
13
LA1 LC012
13
51
51
7
30
40
c
LD1
= 28 =
=
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
= =
54
45
59
90
General:
pages 1/140 to 1/145
= =
54
105
105
243
207357 (LD4)
209359 (LD5)
105
105
65
54
275
Door drillings
105
63
10
59
181
Schemes:
pages 1/176 and 1/177
1/175
Schemes
A1
A2
A2
6/T3
1/L1
5/L3
4/T2
Q1
A1
1/L1
3/L2
2/T1
A1
5/L3
Q1
A2
A1
A2
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
6/T3
For contactor breakers LD1 or LD4 and reversing contactor breakers LD5
Mounted on RH side
Breaker
8
53
63
54
64
LA1 LC031
Control knob
position
General:
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/176
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
31
41
32
42
96
95
23
31
32
24
23
24
Dimensions, mounting:
pages 1/174 and 1/175
13
13
14
10
14
31
32
98
23
24
95
08
05
Isolator
LA1 LC001
95
13
14
98
31
15
31
Auto
32
23
24
13
LA1 LC021
14
42
41
LA1 LC001
18
Mounted on LH side
LA1 LC025
LA1 LC020
32
08
06
+0
05
Short-circuit
signalling
16
95
Trip signallingt
98
13
14
(64) (63)
54
53
53
54
1 or 2 LA1 LC030
LA1 LC012
LA1 LC010
23
Isolator
24
Mounted on LH side
4/T2
Add-on blocks
LA1 LC030
2/T1
6/T3
6/T3
4/T2
LB6 LD03M
96
LB6 LD03M
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
Schemes (continued)
LA1 LC071
LA1 LC052p
D1
C1
TRIP +
RESET
D2
C2
U<
B4
B1
B2
B3
)RUFRQWDFWRUEUHDNHUVDQGUHYHUVLQJFRQWDFWRUEUHDNHUVDOUHDG\WWHGZLWKDQ/$/&RU/$/&LQVWDQWDQHRXVDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWEORFN
3
Interface modules
LA1 LD180
LA1 LD580
A1
A1
+ E1
+ E1
E2
E2
A2
A2
Voltage converter LA1 LD080 (supply with contactor breakers for c control circuit operation)
Switching by control contact
24 or 48 V
E1
A1
E3
(0V)
E2
A2
E1
+
(0V)
E2
A1
A2
Supply
24 or 48 V
E1
Low
level
input
(0V)
A1
E3
E2
A2
10
General:
pages 1/140 to 1/145
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Dimensions, mounting:
pages 1/174 and 1/175
1/177
Presentation,
characteristics
Presentation
Reducing the installation time of components is an important factor that also
increases productivity.
The comprehensive range of adaptors and mounting accessories allows this
objective to be achieved.
There are numerous advantages:
b saving of space in enclosures,
b reduced size of enclosures,
b reduced wiring time,
b increased protection of personnel against accidental direct contact (IP 20) through
the use of insulated mounting rails,
b H[LELOLW\DQGPRGXODULW\RIHTXLSPHQW
b reliable operation of the equipment with easier maintenance.
Description
Power distribution is achieved by a 3-pole or 5-pole busbar system.
The adaptors clip directly onto the busbar system, providing instantaneous electrical
connection. Busbar system pitch: 40 or 60 mm.
These adaptors allow mounting of motor starter components such as:
b GV2 ME, GV2 P or GV3 ME motor circuit-breakers,
b TeSys D and TeSys K contactors up to 38 A,
b integral 63 contactor breakers,
They are available in different sizes to allow easy installation of varying component
combinations.
These adaptors can be used in conjunction with interface modules communicating
with an AS-Interface cabling system. This enables motor starters to be set up on an
AS-Interface cabling system, bringing all the advantages of the 2 technologies.
LA9 Z32199
4
General characteristics
Conforming to standards
Degree of protection
Temperature resistance
Rated frequency of current
Rated operational current Depending on type of busbar
and at 35 C
&RHIFLHQW.WREHDSSOLHG
according to ambient temperature
Rated insulation voltage
Rated operational voltage
Rated permissible
With insulated busbar support
peak current
Busbar dimensions
Rated current
Maximum let-through energy
6XSSRUW[LQJE\VFUHZV
Cabling, by connectors
Flexible cable with cable end
Multi-strand cable
Solid cable
Tightening torque
mm
kA
A 2s
mm
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m
30 x 5
450
30 x 10
630
30 x 5
30 x 10
45
55
6.2 x 108 24.8 x 108
LA9 Z11105
Min.
Max.
120
120
35
120
3 x 12
C
Hz
mm
A
C
K
V
V
IEC 60439
IP 20 with insulated mounting rail LA9 Z098pp
120
50/60
12 x 5
12 x 10
15 x 5
20 x 5
20 x 10 25 x 5
200
360
250
320
520
400
35
40
45
50
55
60
1
0.9
0.75
0.65
0.55
0.35
690 conforming to IEC 60947-1 and NF C 20-040
690
LA9 Z11098 and Z11099
LA9 Z11100 and Z11101
12 x 5
12 x 10
12 x 5
12 x 10 20 x 10
35
35
30
35
35
1 x 108
4 x 108
1 x 108
11 x 108 11 x 108
4x6
4x5
LA9 Z11103
LA9 Z11104
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
4
35
16
70
4
35
16
70
4
35
1x6
1 x 10
LA9 Z
A
V
kA
A2 s
10
References :
pages 1/180 to 1/187
1/178
mm2
Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189
32196
32228
32229
32199
32200
32208 to
210 32232
IP 20
4
6
6
10
AWG 12
AWG 10
AWG 10
AWG 8
PVC 105 C
25
32
32
63
690 conforming to NF C 20-040 and IEC 60947-1
6
6
6
10
2 x 105
2 x 105
2 x 105
3 x 105
32253
32248
32249
16
2.5
AWG 22/14
15
250
80
10
3 x 105
Characteristics
50
40
70
60
30 x 10
12 x 5 and 12 x 10
30
50
30 x 5
20
40
10
30
12 x 10
and 20 x 10
12 x 5
20
200
300
400
500
%XVEDUVXSSRUW[LQJFHQWUHVPP
600
200
300
400
500
%XVEDUVXSSRUW[LQJFHQWUHVPP
600
C.s.a.
Permissible current
12 x 5
200
15 x 5
250
20 x 5
320
25 x 5
400
30 x 5
450
12 x 10
360
20 x 10
520
30 x 10
630
Factor K2
2,2
C
0
5
10
15
2,1
2,0
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
1,9
1,8
1,7
1,6
Ambient temperature
,IWKHDERYHFOLPDWLFFRQGLWLRQVDUHPRGLHGFRQVXOWWKHFKDUWEHORZWRQGWKHFRUUHFWLRQIDFWRU.2 to be applied.
55
60
65
1,5
1,4
1,3
1,2
1,1
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
Example: in normal operating conditions, a set of 30 x 10 tinned busbars can withstand a continuous load of 630 A.
800 A
)RUDORDGRI$WKHFRUUHFWLRQFRHIFLHQW.2 to be applied will be 1.3 ( 630 A ). It follows that the temperature rise of the busbars will be
82.5 C.
References :
pages 1/180 to 1/187
Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/179
10
hhh
40 mm : LA9 Z32228
60 mm : LA9 Z32229
2
40 mm : LA9 Z32196
4
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06K12
40 mm : LA9 Z32199
60 mm : LA9 Z32200
6
GV2 ME, GV2 P
40 mm : LA9 Z40132
60 mm : LA9 Z60132
7
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC1 D09D38
9
LC1 D09D38
10
1/180
References
Operational
current AC-3
440 V
A
12
32
Width x height
of adaptor
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
mm
45 x 139
LA9 Z32196
kg
0.788
45 x 182
LA9 Z32228
0.984
45 x 182
LA9 Z40132
0.984
54 x 182
LA9 Z32199
1.144
Operational
current AC-3
440 V
A
12
Width x height
of adaptor
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
mm
45 x 182
LA9 Z32229
kg
0.984
32
45 x 182
LA9 Z60132
0.984
54 x 182
LA9 Z32200
1.220
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179
Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/181
60 mm : LA9 Z32210
2
40 mm : LA9 Z32232
4
LC2, LP2, LP5 K06K12
40 mm : LA9 Z32208
60 mm : LA9 Z32209
40 mm : LA9 Z40232
60 mm : LA9 Z60232
7
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC2 D09D38
9
LC2 D09D38
10
1/182
References (continued)
Operational
current AC-3
440 V
A
12
Width x height
of adaptor
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
mm
90 x 139
LA9 Z32232
kg
0.788
32
90 x 182
LA9 Z40232
1.884
135 x 182
LA9 Z32208
0.638
Operational
current AC-3
440 V
A
12
Width x height
of adaptor
Sold in
lots of
Unit reference
Weight
mm
90 x 182
LA9 Z32210
kg
1.868
32
90 x 182
LA9 Z60232
1.948
135 x 182
LA9 Z32209
0.651
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179
Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/183
1
60 mm : LA9 Z32253
3
GV3 ME
5
60 mm : LA9 Z32345
7
LD1 LD, LD4 LD
10
1/184
References (continued)
Width x height
of adaptor
mm
108 x 244
Reference
Weight
LA9 Z32345
kg
0.887
GV3 ME
80
72 x 182
LA9 Z32253
0.347
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179
Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/185
LA9 Z32
LA9 Z098
40 mm
LA9 Z11098
LA9 Z11099
LA9 Z11100
LA9 Z11101
LA9 Z32248
LA9 Z32249
5
LA9 Z91413
LA9 Z11105
LA9 Z32
LA9 Z098
LA9 Z11102
60 mm
9
LA9 Z11100
LA9 Z11118
10
LA9 Z11104
LA9 Z11101
LA9 Z11105
1/186
LA9 Z32248
LA9 Z32249
References (continued)
Sold in
lots of
10
Unit
reference
LA9 Z11098
Weight
kg
1.040
3-pole + N + T
10
LA9 Z11099
1.400
10
LA9 Z09818
0.420
10
LA9 Z09820
0.940
Connector
Capacity 35 mm2
50
LA9 Z11103
2.300
Protective cover
LA9 Z91413
0.160
LA9 Z32936
0.472
Width 54 mm
LA9 Z32248
0.066
Width 45 mm
LA9 Z32249
0.055
3-pole
Sold in
lots of
10
Unit
reference
LA9 Z11100
Weight
kg
2.100
3-pole + N
10
LA9 Z11101
2.660
3-pole
10
LA9 Z11102
0.310
4-pole
10
LA9 Z11118
0.380
10
LA9 Z09819
0.800
10
LA9 Z09820
0.940
Capacity 70 mm2
25
LA9 Z11104
1.875
0.719
Protective cover
LA9 Z91413
0.160
Width 54 mm
LA9 Z32248
0.066
Width 45 mm
LA9 Z32249
0.055
Insulated rails
(length 1 m)
Insulated rails
(length 1 m)
Connectors
(1) For dimensions and rated operational current, see pages 1/178 and 1/179
(2) Supplied complete with protective cover
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179
Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/187
Dimensions
Dimensions
40/60 40/60
40/60 40/60
e1
e1
e1
40/60 40/60
GV2 ME or P + LCp D
x
40 mm system
c
a
c or
LC(1)
125
125
Adaptor
reference
LA9 Z32196
60 mm system
c
a
c or
LC(1)
e1
Other
Adaptor
reference
40
45
152
45
152
145
145
LA9 Z32196
40
45
184
125
125
LA9 Z32228
135
135
LA9 Z32229
40
45
184
145
145
LA9 Z32228
155
155
LA9 Z32229
40
45
200
139
139
LA9 Z40132
149
149
LA9 Z60132
40
45
200
142
142
LA9 Z40132
152
152
LA9 Z60132
40
45
200
146
146
LA9 Z40132
156
156
LA9 Z60132
40
45
200
146
146
LA9 Z40132
156
156
LA9 Z60132
40
54
200
131
137
LA9 Z32199
141
147
LA9 Z32200
33
54
200
142
142
LA9 Z32199
152
152
LA9 Z32200
33
54
200
140
146
LA9 Z32199
150
156
LA9 Z32200
33
54
200
142
146
LA9 Z32199
152
156
LA9 Z32200
33
108
244
250
LA9 Z32345
50
GV3 ME
72
182
180
LA9 Z32253
50
X electrical clearance
GV2 ME
GV2 P
integral 63
GV3 ME
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179
1/188
References :
pages 1/180 to 1/187
Ue y 415 V
40
40
20
40
Ue = 440 V
40
80
20
40
Dimensions (continued)
60
40/60 40/60
60
1
e1
integral
e1
Dimensions
a
a
40 mm system
c
a
c or
LC(1)
125
125
Adaptor
reference
LA9 Z32232
60 mm system
c
a
c or
LC(1)
e1
LD5
Adaptor
reference
40
90
150
90
150
145
145
LA9 Z32232
40
90
184
135
135
LA9 Z32210
40
90
184
155
155
LA9 Z32210
40
90
200
139
139
LA9 Z40232
149
149
LA9 Z60232
40
90
200
142
142
LA9 Z40232
152
152
LA9 Z60232
40
90
200
146
146
LA9 Z40232
156
156
LA9 Z60232
40
90
200
146
146
LA9 Z40232
156
156
LA9 Z60232
40
135
203
131
137
LA9 Z32208
141
147
LA9 Z32209
33
135
203
142
142
LA9 Z32208
152
152
LA9 Z32209
33
135
201
140
146
LA9 Z32208
150
156
LA9 Z32209
33
135
201
142
146
LA9 Z32208
152
156
LA9 Z32209
33
90
150
125
LA9 Z32232
40
90
150
145
LA9 Z32232
40
90
184
135
LA9 Z32210
40
90
184
155
LA9 Z32210
40
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179
References :
pages 1/180 to 1/187
1/189
Selection guide
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
Functions
Assembly and connection of motor starter components with spring terminals, without
using tools
Product type
For contactors
TeSys D (9 to 25 A)
Type of starter
Direct
Coil control
Yes
Limited to 60 A (Ith)
Limited to 8 starters (1)
Number of channels
References
LAD 3p
LAD 9AP3pp
Pages
1/197
1/199
Reversing
No
Yes
(1) With TeSys circuit-breakers GV2 ME and upstream terminal block LAD 3B1.
10
1/190
No
Splitter box
4
TeSys D (40 to 65 A)
Direct
Reversing
Yes
Yes
HE 10
16 inputs/12 outputs
LU9 G02
STB EPI2145
1/199
1/199
10
1/191
Presentation
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
7H6\V4XLFNWLVDPRGXODUV\VWHPZKLFKVWDQGDUGLVHVDQGVLPSOLHVVHWWLQJXSRI
motor starters with its pre-wired control and power circuits.
,QVWDOODWLRQRIDPRWRUVWDUWHULVWKHUHIRUHTXLFNVLPSOHVDIHDQGH[LEOH,QDGGLWLRQ
this system:
b enables the motor starter to be customised at a later date,
b reduces maintenance time and
b optimises panel space by reducing the number of terminals and intermediate
interfaces and the amount of ducting.
4
Motor starter with GV2 ME circuit-breakers
b a power circuit connection kit comprising, for each starter, a plate for mounting
the contactor and the circuit-breaker and two power connection modules,
b a power splitter box for 2 or 4 starters,
b an upstream terminal block for a power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2),
b an outgoing terminal block for connection of the motor power supply cables and
the earth cables (6 mm2).
Note: with GV3 circuit-breakers, no accessories are required for pre-wiring of the
power circuit. The GV3 Ppp outgoing terminal block can be removed.
This circuit-breaker is also sold with only one terminal block (reference: GV3 Ppp1).
Control circuit pre-wiring components
(motor starters with TeSys GV2 and GV3 circuit-breakers)
7
Motor starter with GV3 P circuit-breakers
b a control circuit connection module which plugs directly into the contactor and
the circuit-breaker on each starter. This module incorporates status and control data
for this motor starter.
b a parallel wiring module which concentrates the data of each motor starter:
v HE 10 connector, for centralised applications. Data is transmitted to the PLC via
the Advantys Telefast pre-wired system.
v STB, designed for decentralised automation architectures. This module is suitable
IRUXVHLQDQ$GYDQW\V67%FRQJXUDWLRQIRUFRQQHFWLRQWRWKH3/&YLDDHOGEXV
10
Description :
pages 1/194 and 1/195
1/192
Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205
Presentation (continued)
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
Control/command
HE 10 connection
1
1
1 Automation platform
2 Connection cable
TSXCDPpp or ABFH20pp
3 Splitter box LU9 G02
2
2
Connection on bus using Advantys STB (1)
&RQJXUDWLRQH[DPSOH(for motor starter applications only):
Power supply module
Module
STB PDT 3100
Connection base
STB XBA 2200
Terminal block
STB XTB 1130
Parallel interface module (2)
Module
STB EPI 2145
Connection base
STB XBA 3000
Network interface module (3)
CANopen
STB NCO 1010 (4)
Fipio
STB NFP 2210
Ethernet TCP/IP
STB NIP 2210
InterBus
STB NIB 1010 (4)
3UREXV'3
STB NDP 1010 (4)
DeviceNet
STB NDN 1010 (4)
Modbus Plus
STB NMP 2210
Terminal block
STB WTS 2120
7
7 7H6\V4XLFNWPRGXOH
8 Adapter plate APP 2CX
9 Splitter box LU9 G02 for 8 direct motor
starters, with channel connections on the
APP 1C module side by two HE 10
connectors (20-way) and on theTeSys
4XLFNWVLGHE\5-FRQQHFWRUV
10 Connection cable APP 2AH40H060
10
The motor starter is connected to an APP 1Cp module 7 using an adapter plate
APP 2CX 8 and a connection cable APP 2AH40H060 10.
Information is available on the module for each motor starter:
b 1 output: motor control,
b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status.
(1) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution".
(2) For 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters.
(3) Reference to be selected according to the network used.
(4) Optimised version.
Description :
pages 1/194 and 1/195
Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203
10
Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/193
Description
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
Power components
2
4
2a
3
2b
3
4
7
10
Presentation:
pages 1/192 and 1/193
1/194
Characteristics:
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References:
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions:
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes:
pages 1/204 and 1/205
Description (continued)
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
Control/command components
Control circuit connection modules LAD 9 AP3 pp
The control circuit connection module 1 plugs directly into the control terminals on
the contactor and on the TeSys GV2 ME or TeSys GV3 P motor circuit-breaker, in the
location provided for the front-mounting block.
It is compatible with all contactor ratings up to 18 A for TeSys GV2 ME and 65 A for
TeSys GV3 P.
Mechanical locking 2 of the system onto the top of the contactor ensures a perfect
connection, whatever the operating conditions (vibrations, knocks, etc.).
These modules are available in 4 versions: for direct or reversing starter, with or
without contactor coil interface relay.
The coil control can be a.c. or d.c., up to a 250 V and c 130 V.
The version without relay is designed to control the contactor coils with no interface,
at 24 V d.c.
The version with relay has a connector for connecting the contactor power supply.
Module LAD9 AP3pp incorporates, in its lower part, several external connectors:
3 RJ45 connector, for connecting the automation system.
4 2-way connector, for connecting the contactor power supply (only on versions with
relay).
5 2-way connector, for connecting an external contact in series with the contactor coil
(supplied complete with shunt)
3 4 5
This module enables 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters to be connected via the
Advantys STB distributed I/O solution. With STB network interface modules, motor
starters can be connected to the following communication networks: Modbus Plus,
),3,2&$1RSHQ(WKHUQHW7&3,33UREXV'3,17(5%86DQG'HYLFH1HW
(1) Please consult our catalogue Power supplies, splitter boxes and interfaces.
(2) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution".
10
Presentation:
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Characteristics:
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References:
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions:
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes:
pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/195
1
LAD 3B1
2
LAD 352
GV2 MEpp3
LC1 Dpp3
LAD 331
8
LC2 Dpp3
10
1/196
References
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
Power circuit pre-wiring components (only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers)
Description
Maximum
connection c.s.a.
Application
Sold in
lots of
Reference
16 mm2 (1)
Power supply of 1 or 2
power splitter boxes
LAD 3B1
Extension by
Number of starters
Reference
LAD 32p
LAD 322
0.120
LAD 324
0.240
Composition
Reference
LAD 352
Maximum
connection c.s.a.
Application
Sold in
lots of
Reference
6 mm2
Connection of
motor cables
10
LAD 331
No. of
starters
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
10
LAD 311
0.042
10
LAD 341
0.018
Description
Power splitter box, 60 A
Description
LAD 324
Weight
kg
0.212
Weight
kg
Weight
kg
Direct starter
Power connection kit
0.078
Reversing starter
To build a reversing starter, order 2 kits LAD 352
Description
Outgoing terminal block
Description
LAD 352
Weight
kg
0.050
Weight
kg
(1) Cables with one end pre-crimped are available to allow fast connection. References:
1 set of 3 x 6 mm 2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B061, length 2 m: LAD 3B062 and length 3 m: LAD 3B063),
1 set of 3 x 10 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B101, length 2 m: LAD 3B102 and length 3 m: LAD 3B103),
1 set of 3 x 16 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B161, length 2 m: LAD 3B162 and length 3 m: LAD 3B163).
LAD 331
10
Presentation:
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Description:
pages 1/194 and 1/195
Characteristics:
pages 1/200 and 1/201
Dimensions:
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes:
pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/197
LAD 32p
STB EPI 2145
1
GV2 MEpp3
2
LC2 Dpp3
LC1 Dpp3
LU9 G02
LAD 9AP3D1
LAD 9AP3D2
6
GV3 Ppp
LC2 DppA3
LC1 DppA3
9
Note: Circuit-breakers TeSys GV3 P and contactors LC1 D40A3 to D65A3 can be mounted side by side, using a set of S-shape busbars (GV3 S).
10
1/198
References (continued)
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
TeSys D
coil voltage
Type of coil
control relay
Type of
starter
Reference
Weight
kg
a 12... 250 V or
c 5...130 V
Electromechanical
Direct
LAD 9AP31
0.150
Reversing
LAD 9AP32
0.200
c 24 V
Without relay
Direct
LAD 9AP3D1
0.140
Reversing
LAD 9AP3D2
0.190
Description
Advantys STB parallel
interface module
Connectors
Reference
PLC side
2 x HE 10
20-way
8 x RJ45
Weight
kg
LU9 G02
Connectors
Reference
PLC side
4 x RJ45
0.260
Weight
kg
0.165
Connection cables
Between the control connection module and the splitter box LU9 G02 or STB EPI 2145
Connectors
Length
Reference
Weight
m
2 x RJ45 connectors
kg
0.3
LU9 R03
0.045
LU9 R10
0.065
LU9 R30
0.125
Length
Reference
Gauge
C.s.a.
AWG
mm2
22
0.324
0.5
0.085
0.150
0.280
0.410
0.670
0.080
0.140
0.210
0.400
0.660
Characteristics
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
2-way, 5 mm pitch
Wire c.s.a.: 0.22.5 mm
10
APE 1PRE21
0.020
2-way, 5 mm pitch
Wire c.s.a.: 0.75 mm
16
APE 1PAD21
0.020
Connecting cable
between module APP 1Cp and
splitter box LU9 G02 ( length: 0.6 m)
Connectors:
1 x HE 10, 30-way
2 x HE 10, 20-way
APP 2AH40H060
0.400
PLC side
HE 10
20-way
HE 10
20-way
28
Bare wires
Weight
HE 10
20-way
22
0.080
0.324
kg
Separate components
Description
Weight
kg
10
Presentation:
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Description:
pages 1/194 and 1/195
Characteristics:
pages 1/200 and 1/201
Dimensions:
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes:
pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/199
Characteristics
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
LAD 9AP3pp
General environment
Standard
&HUWLFDWLRQV
Degree of protection
Resistance to
incandescent wire
Shock resistance
Vibration resistance
Resistance to
electrostatic discharge
5HVLVWDQFHWRUDGLDWHGHOGV
Immunity to fast
transient currents
Surge withstand
Immunity to
UDGLRHOHFWULFHOGV
Ambient air temperature
V/m
10 (261000 MHz)
Level 3
kV
Operation in
RRUVWDQGLQJHQFORVXUH
Operation in
wall-mounted enclosure
- 5+ 60
- 5+ 40
C
mm
- 40+ 70
> 30
Storage
Space required around
For inserting cables
mounted assembly
and heat dissipation
Degree of pollution
$VVHPEO\[LQJ
(with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers only)
Suitable wire
c.s.a.
IEC 60439-1
UL, CSA
IP 40 (mounted assembly)
960
Level 3
3
2Q[PPUDLOVRUZLWK[PPVFUHZVRQSODWHIRU*90(
mm
mm
mm
3
16
25
mm
25
2
1.5
mm
2.5
mm
2.5
A
V
V
kV
Hz
kA
60
80 % of Imax at 60 C ambient temperature (see table on opposite page)
18 (with an empty slot between two starters)
750
690
6
50-60
50
kA
V
V
V
Per power
supply
Per sub-base
GV2 operating limit
Maximum current per starter
Insulation voltage
Operational voltage
U imp
Rated operational frequency
Rated short-circuit current
conditional Isc at 415 V
Permissible
short-time rating Icw
10
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
1/200
Description :
pages 1/194 and 1/195
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205
Characteristics (continued)
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
7DEOHRI*9FLUFXLWEUHDNHUFXUUHQWOLPLWDWLRQDW&DPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHZLWK7H6\V4XLFNW
Circuit-breaker reference
GV2 ME06
GV2 ME07
GV2 ME08
GV2 ME10
GV2 ME14
GV2 ME16
GV2 ME20
GV2 ME21
0D[LPXPFXUUHQWRI*9ZLWK7H6\V4XLFNW
1.28 A
2A
3.2 A
5A
8A
11.2 A
14.4 A
18 A
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
W
ms
c 24
c 19.2
c 2.4
c 30
15
1
0.36
5
V
V
Hz
A
1F
a 250
c 130
50/60
4
ms
10
ms
Hz
Hz
10
0.5
20
Dielectric strength
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
Primary/secondary rated insulation voltage
Maximum current
24 V - DC13
for 500 000 operations
230 V - AC15
V
1000 (50/60 Hz) - 1 mn
kV
2.5
V
300
A
0.6
A
0.9
(1) Thermal trip setting range.
10
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Description :
pages 1/194 and 1/195
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/201
Dimensions
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
Dimensions
5
2
2
4
255
285
6
(1)
110
135
Mounted assembly with TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors (LC1 D40A3 LC1 D65A3)
Vertical mounting
119
3
2
231
138
141
119
9
141
10
55
55
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
1/202
Description :
pages 1/192 and1/193
Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205
Dimensions (continued),
schemes
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
Dimensions
Parallel wiring modules
Splitter box LU9 G02
56
42
47
75
35
155
35
120
3
10
28,1 (1)
(1) Dimension to be multiplied by the number of STB EPI 2145 modules present in the
FRQJXUDWLRQ
Schemes
Splitter box LU9 G02
X1
Control contact
NC
Output common
NC
Contactor status RJ45
NC
Circuit-breaker
status
Input common
X2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LU9 G02
X3
(2)
RJ45
X4
RJ45
RJ45
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Control contact
NC
Output common
NC
Contactor status
NC
Circuit-breaker
status
Input common
X5
RJ45
(3)
X7
RJ45
X8
RJ45
1 White
2 Brown
3 Green
4 Yellow
5 Grey
6 Pink
7 Blue
8 Red
9 Black
10 Violet
11 Grey-pink
12 Red-blue
13 White-green
14 Brown-green
15 White-yellow
16 Yellow-brown
17 White-grey
18 Grey-brown
19 White-pink
20 Pink-brown
Com
24 V Aux
Inputs
Com
24 V
Outputs
Control X1
Control X2
Control X3
Control X4
Control X5
Control X6
Control X7
Control X8
X10
X6
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ45
Fault X1
Fault X2
Fault X3
Fault X4
Fault X5
Fault X6
Fault X7
Fault X8
Pole status X1
Pole status X2
Pole status X3
Pole status X4
Pole status X5
Pole status X6
Pole status X7
Pole status X8
+ 24 V Aux
- 24 V Aux
+ 24 V Aux
- 24 V Aux
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
X9
Colours of
TSX CDPppp
connection cable
wires (4)
Description :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
10
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/203
Schemes (continued)
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
Wiring schemes
With relay
13
23
24
Q1
14
LAD9 AP32
23
LAD9 AP31
13
24
14
Q1
21
13
Shunt 1
22
14
N
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(1)
KA2 (2)
Ph
KA1 (2)
Ph
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
KM2
(1)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1
Ph
KA1 (2)
22
14
22
14
KM1
(1)
21
KM1
13
13
21
Shunt 2
10
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
1/204
Description :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes (continued)
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
1
13
23
24
Q1
14
23
LAD9 AP3D2
13
LAD9 AP3D1
24
14
Q1
22
(1)
3
KM2
14
(1)
22
KM1
14
KM1
21
13
21
13
21
22
14
13
(1)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1
Shunt 2
10
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Description :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Characteristics :
pages1/200 and 1/201
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and1/203
1/205
3
5
1
8
10
11
12
6
6
9
8
6
7
13
10
10
1/206
15
12
14
Presentation
The assembly of automated control and distribution panels requires the use of
products that are not only safe but also simple and quick to mount and cable.
The AK5 pre-assembled busbar system meets all these criteria by incorporating
prefabricated components which cater for 3 principal functions:
The busbar systems are available in 6 lengths: 344, 452, 560, 668, 992, 1100 mm.
An incoming supply terminal block 2 is located at the extreme left of the busbar
system.
"Knock-out" partitions allow connection of the power supply from above or below to
connectors 3 which are protected by a removable cover 4.
Upstream protection of the busbar system is shown on page 1/208.
Current distribution
Tap-off units 5 (factory assembled) are available in 4 versions:
b 2-pole,
b 3-pole,
b 4-pole (3-phase + Neutral),
b 4-pole (3-phase + Common).
The tap-offs clip onto the busbar system with instantaneous mechanical and
electrical connection to the busbars.
2 ratings are available: 16 and 32 A.
The tap-off units ensure not only rapid mounting, but also a neat appearance for the
power distribution system and complete safety when accessing under live circuit
conditions.
Component mounting
Component mounting plates with incorporated tap-off allow mounting of and supply
of power to components.
They are available in 25 A or 50 A ratings.
These mounting plates clip onto the mounting rail 11, which also supports the busbar
system, and at the same time make electrical connection via the incorporated tapoff.
2 types of mounting plate are available:
b single plates 6 (height 105 mm), with bolt-on 35 mm wide 7 rail 7, which may be
bolted on in one of two positions, allowing height adjustment of 10 mm.
b double plates 8 and 14 (height 190 mm), with two bolt-on, 35 mm wide 7 rails 9
PRXQWHGRQPP[LQJFHQWUHVHDFKUDLOPD\EHEROWHGRQLQRQHRISRVLWLRQV
allowing height adjustment in 10 mm steps. These plates are supplied with
connectors 12 to allow wiring between control and protection devices.
Extension plates 10 can be bolted onto single and double mounting plates to enable
mounting of wider components. Using a side stop 15 in conjunction with these
extension plates also supports the AK5 JB busbar system when used vertically.
A control terminal block 13 comprising a support plate bolted onto the single or
double mounting plates and a 10-pole plug-in block, enables connection of the
control circuit wires (c.s.a. 1.5 mm2 max).
Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209
References :
pages 1/212 and 1/213
Dimensions :
pages 1/214 and 1/215
10
Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 and 1/211
1/207
Characteristics
Conforming to standards
IEC 60439
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
Degree of protection
Flame resistance
2
Number of conductors
Conforming to standard UL 94
V0
AK5 JB14p
4
a
Supply current
4
Rated insulation voltage
Hz
50 or 60
Ambient temperature 35 C
160
&RHIFLHQW.WREHDSSOLHG
according to the
ambient temperature
35
40
45
50
55
60
0.96
0.92
0.88
0.83
0.78
690
600
Off-load plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched on
400
480
Plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched off
690
V
kA
600
25
A 2s
1 x 10 7
Operational voltage
6
Maximum permissible
peak current
Type of protection
10
Fuses
NS 160 H
NS 160 H
aM
gF
160
160
160
160
Prospective
short-circuit current
kA
36
70
100
100
Operational current
160
160
160
160
Maximum c.s.a.
Minimum c.s.a.
mm2
70
2.5
Solid cable
mm2
70
2.5
Tightening torque
Nm
10
Mounting position
Prsentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207
References :
pages 1/212 and 1/213
1/208
Rating
Cabling
Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 and 1/211
Characteristics (continued)
Tap-off characteristics
Type
AK5
AK5
AK5
AK5
AK5
AK5
AK5
PC12
PC12PH
PC13
PC14
PC131
PC32L
PC32LPH PC33
AK5
PC33L
AK5
AK5
PC34
PC331
PC34L
Conforming to standards
IEC 60439
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
Degree of protection
Polarity
Phase
Phase
3-phase
3-phase
Phase
Phase
3-phase
3-phase
Neutral
Phase
Neutral
Common
Neutral
Phase
Neutral
Common
2 x 2.5
2 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
3 x 2.5
2x4
2x4
4x4
3x4
Conductor c.s.a.
mm2
3-phase
3 x 2.5
(UL cables)
3-phase
3x4
1 x 1.5
1 x 1.5
3
Conductor colours
Permissible current
Black
Black
Black
Black
Blue
Blue
White
(Neutral)
(Neutral)
16
Black
16
Black
16
16
kA
A 2s
100 000
16
Black
Black
Blue
Blue
White
(Neutral)
(Neutral)
(Common)
32
32
32
Black
32
Black
32
10
10
(Common)
(Common)
200 000
PVC 105 C
Tap-off characteristics
Type
AK5
PA211N1
PA211N2
PA211N3
PA212N1
PA212N2
PA212N3
AK5
PA211PH12
PA211PH13
PA211PH23
PA212PH12
PA212PH13
PA212PH23
AK5
PA231
PA232
PA232S
AK5
PA241
PA242
AK5
PA2311
PA2312
PA2312S
AK5
PA532
AK5
PA542
AK5
PA5312
Conforming to standards
IEC 60439
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
Degree of protection
Polarity
Phase +
Neutral
Phase +
Phase
3-phase
3-phase
+ Neutral
3-phase
+ Common
3-phase
3-phase
+ Neutral
3-phase
+ Common
Conductor c.s.a.
(UL cables)
mm2
2x4
2x4
3x4
4x4
3x4
1 x 1.5
2 x (3 x 4)
2 x (4 x 4)
2 x (3 x 4)
1 x 1.5
Permissible current
25
25
25
25
25
10
(Common)
50
50
50
10
(Common)
V
kA
A 2s
PVC 105 C
Type
Material
2 mm sheet steel
Surface treatment
Galvanized
10
1/209
Mounting
(equipment possibilities)
2
Note: if the equipment is wider than the
mounting plate, an extension plate can be
used to increase the width of the support
plate.
AK5
PA211N1
PA211N2
PA211N3
AK5
AK5
PA231 PA241
PA2311
(1)
AK5
PA212N1
PA212N2
PA212N3
AK5
PA212PH12
PA213PH13
PA212PH23
AK5
AK5
PA232 PA242
PA2312
(1)
AK5
PA232S
PA2312S
(1)
AK5
AK5
PA532 PA542
PA5312
(1)
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
108
108
108
105
105
105
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
No. of 18 mm pitches
Thermal current
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
50 A
50 A
Application
Ph + N
3-pole
3-pole
3-pole
+N
3-pole
3-pole
3-pole
+N
Minimum
centres
with
60 mm
ducting
3-pole Ph + N
Ph + Ph
+N
Number of points used on the busbar system
320
320
170
170
3
5
270
270
6
6
320
320
320
10
1/210
320
320
Mounting
(equipment possibilities)
(continued)
Minimum
centres with
60 mm
ducting
2
AK5
PA211N1
PA211N2
PA211N3
54
105
3
25 A
Ph + N
AK5
PA231
PA2311
(1)
54
105
3
25 A
3-pole
AK5
AK5
AK5
PA241 PA212N1 PA212PH12
PA212N2 PA213PH13
PA212N3 PA212PH23
54
54
54
105
190
190
3
3
3
25 A
25 A
25 A
3-pole Ph + N
Ph + Ph
+N
Number of points used on the busbar system
AK5PA
232
PA2312
(1)
54
190
3
25 A
3-pole
AK5
AK5
PA242 PA232S
PA2312S
(1)
54
108
190
190
4
6
25 A
25 A
3-pole 3-pole
+N
AK
PA532
PA5312
(1)
108
190
6
50 A
3-pole
AK5
PA542
108
190
6
50 A
3-pole
+N
170
GV3M01 to M40
270
4
3
270
270
270
270
170
170
170
10
1/211
References
Busbar systems
The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support. However. if it is to be used in conjunction with
component mounting plates incorporating a tap-off, it is essential that it is mounted on the AM1 DL201 rail.
When mounting tap-offs, the rated operational current of the busbar system should be taken into account: 160 A at 35 C.
Number of
Number of
Length
Suitable for
Reference
Weight
conductors
tap-offs at
mounting in
18 mm intervals
enclosure width
mm
mm
kg
4 (1)
12
344
600
AK5 JB143
0.700
2
AK5 JB1pp
18
452
800
AK5 JB144
0.900
24
560
800
AK5 JB145
1.100
30
668
800
AK5 JB146
1.300
48
992
1200
AK5 JB149
1.900
54
1100
1200
AK5 JB1410
2.100
2 mm sheet steel
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
mm
2000 (4)
AM1 DL201
Thermal
current
Cable
lengths
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
mm
16
200
6 (2)
AK5 PC12
0.035
32
1000
6 (2)
AK5 PC32L
0.040
16
200
6 (3)
AK5 PC12PH
0.035
32
1000
6 (3)
AK5 PC32LPH
0.040
16
200
AK5 PC13
0.040
32
250
AK5 PC33
0.045
1000
AK5 PC33L
0.060
16
200
AK5 PC14
0.045
32
250
AK5 PC34
0.050
1000
AK5 PC34L
0.065
16
10 (common)
200
AK5 PC131
0.045
32
10 (common)
250
AK5 PC331
0.050
Depth
Length
mm
15
Weight
kg
3.000
AK5 PC12
Number of points
used on the
busbar system
Single-phase
+
Neutral
2-phase
3-phase
7
AK5 PC14
3-phase
+
Neutral
3-phase
+
common
AK5 GF1
Weight
kg
Accessories
Maximum no.
C.s.a. mm2
Sold in
Unit
of connections
lots of
reference
20
AK5 GF1
Cable guide
4
2.5 or 4
(1) 4-pole: 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common.
(2) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (N + L1), 2 sockets (N + L2). 2 sockets (N + L3).
(3) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (L1 + L2), 2 sockets (L1 + L3). 2 sockets (L2 + L3).
(4) Cut and drill to suit use.
Description
10
Presentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207
1/212
Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209
Dimensions :
pages 1/214 and1/215
Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 and 1/211
Weight
kg
0.300
References (continued)
Single-phase
+ neutral
2-phase
AK5 PA231
No. of 18mm
Phase
points used on the
busbar system
3
Ph1+N
Ph2+N
Ph3+N
Ph1+Ph2
Ph1+Ph3
Ph2+Ph3
3-phase
3
3-phase + common 3
3-phase + neutral 3
Reference
25
Number of 6
rails for component support
1
AK5 PA211N1
kg
0.135
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AK5 PA211N2
AK5 PA211N3
AK5 PA211PH12
AK5 PA211PH13
AK5 PA211PH23
AK5 PA231
AK5 PA2311
AK5 PA241
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.140
0.145
0.145
Thermal
currentA
Weight
2-phase
3-phase
3
6
Ph1+N
Ph2+N
Ph3+N
Ph1+Ph2
Ph1+Ph3
Ph2+Ph3
3-phase + neutral 3
3-phase + common 3
6
3-phase + neutral
AK5 PA232
6
Prefabricated 25 A connectors are supplied for connecting the 2 protection and control devices.
Single-phase
+ neutral
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
50
25
25 (10 common)
25 (10 common)
50 (10 common)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
AK5 PA212N1
AK5 PA212N2
AK5 PA212N3
AK5 PA212PH12
AK5 PA212PH13
AK5 PA212PH23
AK5 PA232
AK5 PA232S
AK5 PA532
AK5 PA242
AK5 PA2312
AK5 PA2312S
AK5 PA5312
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.230
0.600
0.700
0.230
0.235
0.610
0.710
50
AK5 PA542
0.715
Extension plates
These plates bolt onto the equipment support plates, after having removed them from the rails, to be able to mount wider
components.
Use
Number of tap-offs
Reference
Weight
at 18 mm intervals
kg
For mounting
Single
4
AK5 PE17
0.100
plates incorDouble
4
AK5 PE27
0.150
porating tap-off
Sold in
lots of
50
Unit
reference
AK5 BT01
Weight
kg
0.005
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
10
AK5 SB1
Thermal
current A
10-pole terminal blocks, for screwing onto plate AK5 PAppp
10
10-pole front connecting plug-in terminal blocks which can be clipped onto 1 6 4 rails
Fixed part
10
10
AB1 DV10235U
10
AB1 DVM10235U
Moving part
10
0.065
Description
Marking
09
+
AZ
Sold in
lots of
25
25
25
25
Unit
reference
AB1 Rp (1)
AB1 R12
AB1 R13
AB1 Gp (1)
Weight
kg
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209
Dimensions :
pages 1/214 and 1/215
10
(1) Replace the p in the selected reference with the number or letter required. Example: AB1 R1 or AB1 GA.
Presentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207
0.047
0.021
Accessories
AK5 SB1
Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 and 1/211
1/213
Dimensions
Busbar systems
AK5 JBppp
82
30
2
79
45
81
G
a
AK5
No. of
18 mm
points
JB143
JB144
JB145
JB146
JB149
JB1410
344
452
560
668
992
1100
330
438
546
654
978
1086
12
18
24
30
48
54
Connection
1 x 70 (1)
2 x 35
2 x (9 x 4)
9x4
+
1 x 2.5
9x4
+
1 x 35
Flexible bar
6
Flexible bar
+
H[LEOHFDEOHZLWKRUZLWKRXWFDEOHHQG
7
(1) Maximum c.s.a. or connection of conductor without cable end.
AK5 PE17
10
38
35,5
10
10
105
105
17,5
45,5
53 (1)
38
53 (1)
45,5
15
46
54
15 7
Note: It is recommended that the power sockets or the removable plates are connected as close as possible to the busbar feed unit.
&DQEH[HGDWPP
Presentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207
1/214
Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209
References :
pages 1/212 and 1/213
Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 and 1/211
71
Dimensions
(continued)
AK5 PE27
53 (1)
53 (1)
190
10
100
10
100
190
40
10
15
46
54
15 7
71
AK5 BT01
AK5 SB1
20
0,8
Side stop
22
4,2
15,5
10
7
&DQEH[HGDWPP
Presentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207
Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209
References :
pages 1/212 and 1/213
Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 et 1/211
1/215